Cat. No. W238-E1-10
SYSMAC
CQM1H/CQM1 Series
Dedicated I/O Units
OPERATION MANUAL
CQM1H/CQM1Series
Dedicated I/O Units
Operation Manual
Revised November 2003
iv
6495
Notice of Changes to Information on
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Manual
W238-E1-10
OMRON Corporation
Thank you for supporting OMRON products.
The EC Directive EN 61131-2 was modified as of May 1, 2006. As a result of the modification, the EC Directive
information provided in the manual is not completely accurate. Please use the information provided below.
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
Concepts
■ EMC Directives
OMRON supplies electric devices that are used built into other devices or manufacturing equipment.
These OMRON products are designed to conform to the related EMC standards (see note) so that the
devices or equipment in which they are used can more easily conform to EMC standards.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that conform to EC Directives will vary depending on
the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON
devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and
the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note: Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows: EN 61131-2
■ Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75 to 1,500 V DC meet the
required safety standards for the PLC (EN 61131-2).
Conformance to EC Directives
CQM1-series products conform to EC Directives (see note). However, the following precautions must be
observed to ensure that the machine or device in which the CQM1 PLC is used conforms to EC
Directives:
1
The CQM1 PLC must be installed within a control panel.
2
You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies connected to the
power supply terminals on PLCs that take DC power and for the DC power supplies connected to
I/O Units. The DC power supply connected to the power supply terminals on PLCs using DC power
must have an output hold time of at least 10 ms.
3
CQM1-series products conforming to EC Directives also conform to EN 61131-2 for EMI. Radiated
emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control
panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must
therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment conforms to EC Directives even when using
CQM1-series products that conform to EC Directives.
Note: Of the products that appear in this manual, the following products conform to EC Directives.
CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit
CQM1-AD041 Analog Input Unit
CQM1-DA021 Analog Output Unit
CQM1-IPS0□ Analog Power Supply Units
CQM1-TC20□/TC30□ Temperature Control Units
Conditions for Conforming to EMC Directives
The following immunity test conditions (i.e., error resulting from momentary variations in I/O data) apply
to CQM1 Analog I/O Units.
Overall Accuracy
CQM1-AD041 Analog Input Unit:
+12%/−6%
CQM1-DA021 Analog Output Unit: +12%/−6%
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC" means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything
else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1993
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
4
5
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PART I
B7A Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
Connections to B7A Link Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
xvi
xvi
xvi
xvii
xviii
1
3
4
5
5
6
7
11
12
17
19
20
22
Appendices
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PART II
G730 Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
Transmission Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Output Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
4-3
Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
27
29
30
31
34
35
36
39
43
44
45
47
48
54
54
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendices
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
B
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
PART III
I/O Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
63
65
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Word Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
66
66
67
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
71
SECTION 3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
3-1
SYSMAC BUS Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
Appendices
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PART IV
Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply Units . . .
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
77
79
81
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
83
83
84
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
89
SECTION 3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
3-1
3-2
3-3
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Number Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming and Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
94
96
Appendices
viii
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
B
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART V
Analog Output Unit and Analog Power Supply Units. .
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
Features of Analog Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Number Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
111
112
112
115
116
117
119
120
122
123
Appendices
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
B
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
PART VI
Sensor Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
Wiring Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting and Dismounting the Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of CQM1-TU001 Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of a Variety of Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Sensor Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Remote Console Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
133
134
134
135
136
137
138
142
145
146
148
149
149
153
154
161
162
162
Appendices
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART VII
Linear Sensor Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
175
177
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
179
SECTION 2
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaled Conversion Data/Comparison Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teaching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forced Zero (Zero-shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Monitor Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
183
186
187
188
188
SECTION 3
Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
3-1
3-2
Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
193
SECTION 4
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
4-1
Mounting and Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
SECTION 5
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
Operating Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Console Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
199
200
202
205
207
SECTION 6
Applied Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Scaling Value Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Value Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forced-zero Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BCD Value Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
211
212
213
214
SECTION 7
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
7-1
7-2
7-3
Command Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
218
218
Appendices
x
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
B
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
C
Data Processing Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
D
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART VIII
Temperature Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Temperature Control Unit Model Numbers . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
CQM1-TC20@/TC30@ Temperature Control Units. . .
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
Features and Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminology and Function Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOTC(––). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
CQM1-TC00@/TC10@ Temperature Control Units. . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
Features and Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT (Expansion Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
241
243
244
245
248
251
253
254
262
269
270
271
272
273
274
276
277
282
287
289
xi
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CQM1H/CQM1-series Dedicated I/O Units
and includes the parts and sections described below. The CQM1H/CQM1-series Dedicated I/O Units
consist of the Units listed below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install and operate the CQM1H/CQM1-series Dedicated I/O Units.
Part I: B7A Interface Units
Section 1 describes the general features, system configuration, and word allocation of the B7A Interface Units.
Section 2 provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the B7A Interface Units.
Section 3 describes the connections between the B7A Interface Units and B7A Link Terminals.
The Appendix provides the specifications for the Units.
Part II: G730 Interface Units
Section 1 describes the general features, system configuration, and word allocation of the G730 Interface Units.
Section 2 provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the G730 Interface Units.
Section 3 describes the connections between the G730 Interface Units and G730 Remote Terminals.
Section 4 provides the operational procedures for the G730 Interface Unit.
The Appendices provide the specifications, dimensions, and troubleshooting procedure for the Units.
Part III: I/O Link Unit
Section 1 describes the general features, system configuration, and word allocation of the CQM1LK501 I/O Link Unit.
Section 2 provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit.
Section 3 describes the SYSMAC BUS cable connections for the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit.
The Appendix provides the specifications for the Unit.
Part IV: Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply Units
Section 1 provides the features and system configuration relating to the Analog Input Unit and Analog
Power Supply Units.
Section 2 provides the nomenclature and functions of the Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply
Units.
Section 3 provides the operational procedures for the Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply
Units.
The Appendices provide the specifications, internal configuration, dimensions, and troubleshooting
procedure for the Units.
Part V: Analog Output Unit and Analog Power Supply Units
Section 1 provides the features and system configuration relating to the Analog Output Unit and Analog Power Supply Units.
Section 2 provides the nomenclature and functions of the Analog Output Unit.
Section 3 provides the operational procedures for the Analog Output Unit.
The Appendices provide the specifications and troubleshooting procedures for the Units.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xiii
Part VI: Sensor Unit
Section 1 provides the features and system configuration relating to the Sensor Unit and dedicated
sensor modules.
Section 2 provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the CQM1-SEN01, CQM1-TU001, E3XMA11, E3C-MA11, and E2C-MA11.
Section 3 describes the connections between the CQM1-SEN01 and E3X-MA11, E3C-MA11, E2CMA11, and CQM1-TU001.
Section 4 provides information on the operation of the CQM1-SEN01.
Section 5 provides information on the operation of the CQM1-TU001 Remote Console.
The Appendix provides the specifications for the Units.
Part VII: Linear Sensor Interface Units
Section 1 provides the features and system configuration relating to the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
Section 2 provides an explanation of the scaling, timing hold, measured value, teaching, forced-zero
shift, and monitor output functions.
Section 3 provides the nomenclature, and terminal and indicator functions of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
Section 4 describes the connections of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
Section 5 describes the basic operation of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit using the Programming
Console.
Section 6 describes the applied operation of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit using the Programming
Console.
Section 7 provides details on the commands and responses of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
The Appendices provide the specifications, block diagram, data processing timing, and troubleshooting for the Units.
Part VIII: Temperature Control Units
Section 1 lists the Temperature Control Unit model numbers and the basic specifications for each Unit.
Section 2 describes the features and operation of the CQM1-TC20@/TC30@ Temperature Control
Units.
Section 3 describes the features and operation of the CQM1-TC00@/TC10@ Temperature Control
Units.
The Appendix provides the specifications for the Unit.
xiv
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable
Controller. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PC system.
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
3
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
5
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
xv
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits, i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller (CPU Unit and associated Units; referred to as “PC”), in order to
ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the
PC or another external factor affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may
result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
xvi
Operating Environment Precautions
4
• The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PC) is overloaded
or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being
turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety
measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or editing the I/O area. Doing either of these without confirming
safety may result in injury.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!Caution Provide appropriate safety measures, such as overheat prevention and alarm
systems, in separate circuits to ensure safety of the entire system even when
the Temperature Controller malfunctions.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
xvii
5
Application Precautions
!Caution The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC System.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always ground to 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Improper
grounding may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the
following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or
electric shock.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting or wiring the cables.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Mount the Unit only after checking the terminal block completely.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals.
Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Always use the power supply voltage specified in this operation manual.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
xviii
5
Application Precautions
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand
voltage tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result
in burning.
• Double-check all the wiring and switch settings before turning ON the
power supply. Incorrect wiring or switch settings may result in burning.
• Check that the DIP switches and data memory (DM) are properly set
before starting operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation. Not doing
so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables. Doing so may break the cables.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object
in order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the Unit while data is being transferred.
• When transporting or storing the product, cover the PCBs with electrically
conductive materials to prevent LSIs and ICs from being damaged by
static electricity, and also keep the product within the specified storage
temperature range.
• Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper
installation of the Unit may result in malfunction.
• Provide a control circuit so that the power to the I/O circuits will turn ON
after the power to the PC turns ON. If the power to the I/O circuits turns
ON before the power to the PC turns ON, the system may malfunction
temporarily.
• If the I/O Hold Bit (SR 25212) is turned ON, the outputs from the PC will
not be turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
xix
5
Application Precautions
with the FALS(07) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
• When assembling the Units or mounting the end cover, be sure to lock
them securely as shown in the following illustrations. If they are not properly locked, desired functionality may not be achieved.
• Be sure to mount the end cover to the rightmost Unit.
• Be sure that the connectors, terminal blocks, connection cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Be sure to confirm the orientation and polarities when connecting terminal
blocks and connectors.
• Do not touch the back side of circuit boards or the components mounted
to them with your bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on
the boards that may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Provide sufficient clearances around the Unit and other devices to ensure
proper heat dissipation. Do not cover the ventilation openings of the Unit.
• Do not allow metallic objects or conductive wires to enter the Unit.
• Set the operating settings of the Temperature Controller properly according to the system to be controlled.
• Allow at least 30 minutes after turning ON the Temperature Controller as
warmup time.
• Do not use thinner to clean the product. Use commercially available
cleaning alcohol.
xx
PART I
B7A Interface Unit
CQM1-B7A02
CQM1-B7A03
CQM1-B7A12
CQM1-B7A13
CQM1-B7A21
1
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section describes the general features, system configuration, and word allocation of the CQM1-B7A@@ Interface
Units.
1-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
1-3
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
1-3-1
CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
1-3-2
B7A Link Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
1-4
Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-5
Bit Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
3
Section 1-1
Features
1-1
Features
• The CQM1-B7A@@ Interface Unit incorporates the B7A transmission
operations for the CQM1H/CQM1 I/O Unit.
• The following five models of CQM1H/CQM1 B7A Interface Unit are available.
Model
No. of points
Input
CQM1-B7A21
16
Output
16
CQM1-B7A13
CQM1-B7A03
32
0
0
32
CQM1-B7A12
CQM1-B7A02
16
0
0
16
• Each Unit can be connected to the same number of points on 16-point
B7A Link Terminals as provided by the Unit. For example, two B7A Link
Terminal Units with 16 input points each can be connected to a CQM1B7A13.
• The transmission delay time can be switched between STANDARD (19.2
ms rated) or RAPID (3 ms rated).
• The data processing when a transmission error occurs can be switched
between HOLD (see note 1) and LOAD OFF (see note 2).
• The CPU treats the B7A Interface Units as the equivalent number of
points. It can handle remote I/O equipment, such as switches and lamps,
without recognizing communications.
Note
1. HOLD: When an error occurs, the input bit status immediately prior to the
error is held.
2. LOAD OFF: When an error occurs, all input bits turn off.
The B7A Link Terminal is a terminal board that incorporates a communication
function, connects to external I/O devices, and communicates with a PC over
a single cable, thus reducing wiring effort.
Differences Between
CQM1-B7A01 and
CQM1-B7A21
CQM1-B7A21 is an upgraded version of the CQM1-B7A01 and can replace
the CQM1-B7A01.
The features listed in the table below have been added to the CQM1-B7A21.
Item
Transmission delay time
CQM1-B7A01
STANDARD only
Transmission error
processing
HOLD
CQM1-B7A21
STANDARD/RAPID
switchable
HOLD/LOAD OFF switchable
Note CQM1-B7A01 is no longer in production. Use the upgraded CQM1-B7A21.
4
Section 1-2
System Configuration
1-2
System Configuration
The following is a CQM1H/CQM1 system configuration with a B7A Interface
Unit.
B7A Interface Unit
CQM1H/CQM1
Transmission distance: 500 m max.
B7A Link Terminal (for input) B7A Link Terminal (for output)
Switch
Sensor
Lamps
Note The maximum transmission distance depends on the transmission delay time
and the power supply wiring.
Refer to 3-1 Connections to B7A Link Terminals.
1-3
1-3-1
Connecting Devices
CPU
The B7A Interface Unit connects to the following CPUs.
Name
CQM1H-series CPU
CQM1-series CPU
1-3-2
Model
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CQM1-CPU11-E
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
B7A Link Terminal
The B7A Interface Unit connects to the following 16-point B7A Link Terminals
with a standard I/O delay of 19.2 ms (typical).
Input
Name
Screw terminal models
Module models
PC connector models
Model
B7A-T6@1
B7AS-T6@1
B7A-T6@6
B7AS-T6@6
B7A-T6D2
B7A-T6D7
B7A-T@E3
B7A-T@E8
Transmission delay time
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
RAPID (3 ms)
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
RAPID (3 ms)
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
RAPID (3 ms)
5
Section 1-4
Word Allocation
Output
Name
Screw terminal model
Model
B7A-R6@@1
Transmission delay time
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
B7AS-R6@@1
B7A-R6@@6
RAPID (3 ms)
Module model
B7AS-R6@@6
B7A-R6A52
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
PC connector models
B7A-R6A57
B7A-R@A@3
RAPID (3 ms)
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
B7A-R@A@8
RAPID (3 ms)
Note Combine B7A Interface Units and B7A Link Terminals with equal transmission
delay times.
Transmission errors will occur if the transmission delay times used in the combination are not equal.
Do not connect B7A Link Terminals with 10 points and I/O mixed points. Connect only 16-point transmission models.
1-4
Word Allocation
The CPU treats the B7A Interface Unit as an equivalent number of connected
I/O Units. The words allocation is identical to that for I/O Units, with inputs and
outputs allocated from left to right.
6
Section 1-5
Bit Allocation
Words from 000 including the input bits incorporated by the CPU are allocated
for input and words from 100 are allocated for output as shown in the following
illustration. Refer to the CQM1H or CQM1 Operation Manual for details on I/O
word allocation.
PS
CPU
IN
OUT
B7A21
Power Supply Unit
CPU
Input Unit and terminals
Output Unit
B7A Interface Unit
(16 input and 16 output points)
B7A12 : B7A Interface Unit
(16 input points)
B7A03 : B7A Interface Unit
(16 output points)
B7A03
16
pts
OUT
IN
16
pts
B7A21
IN
B7A12
CQM1H/CQM1
Word
Connection terminals 2
Connection terminals 1
16
pts
:
:
:
:
:
B7A Link Terminal (for output)
Word 103
B7A Link Terminal (for input)
Points:
0 to 15
Bit no.:
10300 to 10315
Word 001
B7A Link Terminal (for output)
Word 102
Points:
0 to 15
Bit no.:
00100 to 00115
B7A Link Terminal (for input)
0 to 15
Bit no.:
10200 to 10215
B7A Link Terminal (for output)
Word 100
Word 003
1-5
Points:
Points:
0 to 15
Bit no.:
00300 to 00315
Points:
0 to 15
Bit no.:
10000 to 10015
Bit Allocation
The bit allocation for each model is described below.
CQM1-B7A21
I/O
Input
Output
(see
note 3)
Word no.
Terminal
n
1
(see note 2)
m
2
(see note 2)
Bit
15
14 to 12 11 to 8
See
Input bits
note 1
Output bits
7 to 4
3 to 0
7
Section 1-5
Bit Allocation
CQM-B7A13
I/O
Word no.
Terminal
Input
n
1
Input
n+1
2
15
See
note 1
See
note 1
14 to 12
Input bits
Bit
11 to 8
7 to 4
3 to 0
Input bits
CQM1-B7A03
I/O
Word no.
Output
(see
note 3)
Output
(see
note 3)
Terminal
Bit
m
1
15 to 12
Output bits
m+1
2
Output bits
11 to 8
7 to 4
3 to 0
CQM1-B7A12
I/O
Input
Word no.
n
Terminal
1
15
14 to 12
See note Input bits
1
Bit
11 to 8
7 to 4
3 to 0
CQM1-B7A02
I/O
Output
(see
note 3)
Note
Word no.
m
Terminal
1
Bit
15 to 12
Output bits
11 to 8
7 to 4
3 to 0
1. Bit 15 of the input address is allocated as follows, according to the DIP
switch input mode setting.
15-point input + 1 error mode setting = transmission error bit
16-point input = input bit 15
Refer to 2-2 Switch Settings.
2. Start word address (n: input, m: output)
3. See the following caution.
!Caution The minimum input time (minimum required time to read input signal from
CPU) at output bit of the B7A Interface Unit is as follows:
Transmission delay time
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
RAPID (3 ms)
Minimum input time
16 ms
2.4 ms
When a user program is created, make sure the ON/OFF signal range from
the CPU to the B7A Interface Unit’s output bit is larger than the above values.
If smaller than the above values, data might not be correct transmitted.
Transmission Errors
Power On
If the input mode is set to 15IN+ERR, the transmission error bit becomes OFF
when the CQM1H/CQM1 power is turned on.
The transmission error bit turns ON if normal transmission with the input B7A
Link Terminal is not established within 10 ms.
All input bits remain OFF from the time CQM1H/CQM1 is turned on until normal transmission is established.
8
Section 1-5
Bit Allocation
Inputs
When a transmission error occurs, the input bits are processed according to
the transmission error processing setting: HOLD or LOAD OFF.
If the input mode is set to 15IN+ERR, the transmission error bit turns ON.
The transmission error bit turns OFF when normal transmission is re-established.
The normally received signals are then input to the input bits.
Outputs
A transmission error with an output B7A Link Terminal can only be detected at
the Link Terminal. Confirm the error with the Link Terminal ERR indicator and
error output.
9
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Settings
This section provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the CQM1-B7A@@ Interface Units.
2-1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
2-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
11
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1
Nomenclature
CQM1-B7A21
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 1
For connection of a 16-point output B7A Link Terminal.
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 2
For connection of a 16-point Input B7A Link Terminal.
External power terminals
Required for transmission with the B7A Link Terminal. Connect a 12- to-24 VDC power supply.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
Name
Function
RDY
Unit ready
Green
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is supplied with
power.
ERR
Input
transmission
error
Red
Lit if the B7A Link Terminal for input is malfunctioning or the B7A Link Terminal for
input is disconnected.
3ms
Transmission
delay time
Orange
Lit while transmission delay time is set to
RAPID (3 ms). Not lit when set to STANDARD (19.2 ms).
Transmission
error
processing
15IN+ERR Input mode
Orange
Lit while transmission error processing is
set to LOAD OFF. Not lit when set to HOLD.
Orange
Lit while input mode is set to 15IN+ERR.
Not lit when set to 16IN.
LOAD
OFF
12
Color
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
CQM1-B7A13
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 1
For connection of a 16-point Input B7A Link Terminal.
Inputs least-significant word (n) data.
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 2
For connection of a 16-point Input B7A Link Terminal.
Inputs most-significant word (n+1) data.
External power terminals
Required for transmission with the B7A Link Terminal. Connect a 12- to 24-VDC power supply.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
RDY
3ms
Name
Unit ready
Color
Green
Transmission
delay time
Orange
Transmission
error
processing
15IN+ERR Input mode
Orange
ERR1
Input 1
transmission
error
Red
ERR2
Input 2
transmission
error
Red
LOAD
OFF
Orange
Function
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is supplied with
power.
Lit while transmission delay time is set to
RAPID (3 ms). Not lit when set to STANDARD (19.2 ms).
Lit while transmission error processing is
set to LOAD OFF. Not lit when set to HOLD.
Lit while input mode is set to 15IN+ERR.
Not lit when set to 16IN.
Lit when normal transmission with the Input
B7A Link Terminal connected to connection
terminals 1 is not possible or when no Input
B7A Link Terminal is connected.
Lit when normal transmission with the Input
B7A Link Terminal connected to connection
terminals 2 is not possible or when no Input
B7A Link Terminal is connected.
13
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
CQM1-B7A03
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 1
For connection of a 16-point output B7A Link Terminal.
outputs least-significant word (m) data.
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 2
For connection of a 16-point output B7A Link Terminal.
outputs most-significant word (m+1) data.
External power terminals
Required for transmission with the B7A Link Terminal. Connect a 12- to 24-VDC power supply.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
RDY
Name
Unit ready
19ms/3ms Transmission
delay time
14
Color
Green
Function
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is supplied with
power.
Orange Lit while transmission delay time is set to
RAPID (3 ms). Not lit when set to STANDARD (19.2 ms).
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
CQM1-B7A12
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 1
For connection of a 16-point Input B7A Link Terminal.
External power terminals
Required for transmission with the B7A Link Terminal. Connect a 12- to-24 VDC power supply.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
Name
Color
Function
RDY
Unit ready
Green
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is supplied with
power.
ERR
Input
transmission
error
Red
Lit if the B7A Link Terminal for input is malfunctioning or the B7A Link Terminal for
input is disconnected.
3ms
Transmission
delay time
Orange
Transmission
error
processing
15IN+ERR Input mode
Orange
Lit while transmission delay time is set to
RAPID (3 ms). Not lit when set to STANDARD (19.2 ms).
Lit while transmission error processing is
set to LOAD OFF. Not lit when set to HOLD.
LOAD
OFF
Orange
Lit while input mode is set to 15IN+ERR.
Not lit when set to 16IN.
15
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
CQM1-B7A02
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
B7A Link Terminal connection terminals 1
For connection of a 16-point output B7A Link Terminal.
External power terminals
Required for transmission with the B7A Link Terminal. Connect a 12- to 24-VDC power supply.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
Name
RDY
Unit ready
19ms/3ms Transmission
delay time
Left-side View
Color
Green
Orange
Function
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is supplied with
power.
Lit while transmission delay time is set to
RAPID (3 ms). Not lit when set to STANDARD (19.2 ms).
Common to all models.
Operation setting DIP Switch
Sets to the operation of the
B7A Interface Unit (see page
15). Set the switches before
mounting the B7A Interface
Unit in CQM1H/CQM1. To set
after mounting, remove the terminal block and make the setting from the front face.
16
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
2-2
Switch Settings
Remove the terminal block to expose the DIP switch underneath. Refer to the
CQM1H Operation Manual (W363) or the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226)
for the method of removing the terminal block.
Use a thin-tipped object, such as a small screwdriver, to set the pins.
DIP switch
CQM1-B7A21/CQM1-B7A12
Pin no.
→
Setting
OFF
ON
4
Transmission delay
time
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
RAPID (3 ms)
3
Transmission error
processing
HOLD
LOAD OFF
2
1
Input mode
ERR indicator
16IN
Not lit
15IN+ERR
Lit
Note On delivery from the factory, pin 1 is set ON and all others OFF.
CQM1-B7A03/CQM1-B7A02
Pin no.
→
Setting
OFF
ON
4
Transmission delay
time
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
RAPID (3 ms)
3
2
Not used (set OFF)
Not used (set OFF)
–––
–––
–––
–––
1
Not used (set OFF)
–––
–––
Note On delivery from the factory, all pins set OFF.
CQM1-B7A13
Pin no.
6
4
3
2
1
5
→
Setting
Transmission delay
time
Transmission error
processing
Input mode
OFF
ON
STANDARD (19.2 ms)
RAPID (3 ms)
HOLD
LOAD OFF
16IN
15IN+ERR
ERR1 indicator
ERR2 indicator
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Not used (set OFF)
–––
–––
Note On delivery from the factory, pins 2 and 3 are set ON and all others OFF.
!Caution Turn off the CQM1H/CQM1 power before setting the pins.
17
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
Transmission Delay Time
Setting
Sets the transmission delay time for the B7A Interface Unit.
Setting
ON
Transmission Delay Time
RAPID (3 ms)
OFF
STANDARD (19.2 ms) (factory setting)
Set the transmission delay time to RAPID to enable transmission with highspeed B7A Link Terminals with a transmission delay time of 3 ms. Set the
transmission delay time to STANDARD to enable transmission with standard
B7A Link Terminals with a transmission delay time of 19.2 ms.
Set the pin to match the transmission delay time of the type of B7A Link Terminal connected. A transmission error will occur if the setting does not match
the transmission delay time of the B7A Link Terminal.
The transmission delay time setting is made for the entire Unit. It is not possible to make separate settings for each word if multiple words are used.
Transmission Error
Processing Setting
This setting determines whether the input bit status immediately prior to the
error is held when a transmission error occurs (HOLD) or whether all input bits
turn off (LOAD OFF).
Setting
ON
OFF
Input Mode Setting
Set the input mode (the use of bit 15) from the Input B7A Link Terminal to one
of the modes shown in the table below. Match the pin setting to the Input B7A
Link Terminal.
Setting
ERR Indicator Lighting
Setting
Transmission error processing
LOAD OFF
HOLD (factory setting)
Input mode
ON
15-point input + 1 error
(15IN+ERR)
OFF
16-point input (16IN)
Description
Bit 15 used as transmission error bit. The
bits available for input are the 15 bits from
00 to 14.
Bit 15 also used as a normal input bit. The
bits available for input are the 16 bits from
00 to 15. (factory setting)
Sets whether the ERR indicator lights when an input transmission error
occurs.
Setting
ON
Description
ERR indicator lights (factory setting)
OFF
ERR indicator does not light
To avoid indicator lighting unnecessarily, set pin OFF if the input side of the
B7A Interface Unit is not used.
18
SECTION 3
Connections
This section describes the connections between the CQM1-B7A@@ Interface Units and B7A Link Terminals.
3-1
3-2
Connections to B7A Link Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
3-1-1
Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
3-1-2
Connecting Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
19
Section 3-1
Connections to B7A Link Terminals
3-1
3-1-1
Connections to B7A Link Terminals
Recommended Cables
The B7A Interface Unit can be connected to the input and output B7A Link
Terminals using the following cables.
Standard Transmission Delay-time Type
Cabtire Cable
Use a VCTF 0.75 x 3 C cabtire cable (100 m max.) if a power supply is shared
and a VCTF 0.75 x 2 C cabtire cable (500 m max.) if power is supplied independently.
Rapid Transmission Delay-time Type
Shielded Cable
Use a 0.75 x 3 C shielded cable (50 m max.) if a power supply is shared and a
0.75 x 2 C shielded cable (100 m max.) if power is supplied independently.
!Caution If shielded cable is not used for the high-speed transmission delay-time Link
Terminal, the transmission distance is not to exceed 10 m regardless of
whether power supply is shared or wired separately.
3-1-2
Connecting Terminals
Connect the input and output B7A Link Terminals to the B7A Interface Unit via
the following terminals using crimp-style terminals used for CQM1H/CQM1 I/
O Units.
CQM1-B7A21
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the output B7A Link terminal.
B0
A0
B1
A1
Unused
Word m
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the output B7A Link Terminal.
B2
A2
B3
A3
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the input B7A Link Terminal.
Word n
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the input B7A Link Terminal.
CQM1-B7A13
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the input B7A Link terminal.
B0
A0
B1
A1
Unused
Word n
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the input B7A Link Terminal.
B2
A2
A3
B3
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the input B7A Link Terminal.
Word n + 1
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the input B7A Link Terminal.
20
Section 3-1
Connections to B7A Link Terminals
CQM1-B7A03
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the output B7A Link terminal.
B0
A0
B1
A1
Unused
Word m
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the output B7A Link Terminal.
B2
A2
B3
A3
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the output B7A Link Terminal.
Word m + 1
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the output B7A Link Terminal.
CQM1-B7A12
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the input B7A Link terminal.
B0
A0
A1
Unused
B1
Word n
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the input B7A Link Terminal.
B2
A2
B3
Unused
A3
CQM1-B7A02
Connect to the SIG terminal of
the output B7A Link terminal.
B0
A0
B1
A1
Unused
Word m
Connect to the negative power supply terminal of the output B7A Link Terminal.
B2
A2
B3
Unused
A3
Connectors
Crimp connectors for I/O Unit wiring should be less than 6.2 mm wide (M3),
and the wire should be AWG22 to 18 (0.3 to 0.75 mm2).
Terminal screws should be tightened with a torque of 0.5 N • m.
6.2 mm max.
6.2 mm max.
!Caution Forked crimp connectors are required by UL and CSA standards.
21
Section 3-2
Wiring
3-2
Wiring
Wiring between the B7A Interface Unit, input B7A Link Terminal, and output
B7A Link Terminal sharing a single power supply differs from wiring between
Units using independent power supplies as shown in the following diagrams.
Standard Transmission Delay-time Link Terminal
Single Power Supply
Terminal screws: M3.5
B7A Interface Unit
Terminal screws: M3
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
–
–
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 min.
+
12 to 24 VDC
Independent Power Supplies
Terminal screws: M3.5
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC
+
Terminal screws: M3
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission distance: 500 m max.
–
–
12 to 24 VDC
+
B7A Link Terminal
+
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 min.
12 to 24 VDC
Note
1. The transmission distance depends on the type of wiring used.
2. The size of terminal screw differs for the B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link
Terminal. Consider the size of the terminal screws when using crimped terminals.
22
Section 3-2
Wiring
3. Locate transmission cables away from power cables and high-voltage cables to eliminate the effects of noise.
Rapid Transmission Delay-time Link Terminal
Single Power Supply
Terminal screws: M3.5
B7A Interface Unit
Terminal screws: M3
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission distance:
50 m max.
–
–
Ground
Shielded cable:
0.75 mm2 min.
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable:
shielded, 0.75 mm2 min.
+
Ground
12 to 24 VDC
Independent Power Supplies
Terminal screws: M3.5
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC
Terminal screws: M3
+
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission distance:
50 m max.
–
–
Shielded cable:
0.75 mm2 min.
Ground
12 to 24 VDC
+
+
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable:
shielded, 0.75 mm2 min.
Ground
12 to 24 VDC
Note
1. The transmission distance depends on the type of wiring used.
2. The size of terminal screw differs for the B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link
Terminal. Consider the size of the terminal screws when using crimped terminals.
3. It is recommend that the shield wire be grounded.
23
Wiring
Section 3-2
4. If shielded cable is not used, the transmission distance is not to exceed
10 m regardless of whether power supply is common or wired separately
(using VCTF 0.75 mm2 min.).
5. Locate transmission cables away from power cables and high-voltage cables to eliminate the effects of noise.
24
Appendix A
Specifications
Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the B7A Interface Unit conform to those of the CQM1H/CQM1 PC.
Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
I/O points
B7A21:
B7A13:
B7A03:
B7A12:
B7A02:
16 input points (see note 1), 16 output points
32 input points (see note 2)
32 output points
16 input points (see note 1)
16 output points
I/O word allocation
B7A21:
B7A13:
B7A03:
B7A12:
B7A02:
1 word each for input and output (2 words in total)
2 words for input
2 words for output
1 word for input
1 word for output
Communication method
Transmission distance
(see note 3)
Unidirectional, time-division multiplex
STANDARD:
500 m max.
RAPID:
100 m max.
Transmission delay time
STANDARD:
RAPID:
19.2 ms (rated delay), 31 ms max.
3 ms (rated delay), 5 ms max.
Minimum input time
(see note 4)
STANDARD:
RAPID:
16 ms
2.4 ms
Power consumption
External power supply
Weight
100 mA at 5 VDC
12 to 24 VDC ±10% (excluding the power required by the B7A Link Terminals)
B7A21: 0.11 A min.
B7A13: 0.07 A min.
B7A03: 0.10 A min.
B7A12: 0.05 A min.
B7A02: 0.04 A min.
200 g max.
Dimensions
32 x 110 x 107 (W x H x D) mm
1. Input mode setting allows selection between 16-point input and 15-point+1 error input.
2. Input mode setting allows selection between 32-point input and 30-point+2 error input. Refer to 2-2
Switch Settings.
3. The maximum transmission distance of the B7A Interface Unit varies with the transmission delay time
and the method of wiring. Refer to 3-1 Connections to B7A Link Terminals for details.
4. Minimum input time is the minimum required time to read an input signal from the CPU. The ON/OFF
signal range from the CPU to the B7A Interface Unit’s output bit should be larger than the minimum
input time.
25
Specifications
Appendix A
Dimensions
These dimensions are the same for all B7A Interface Unit models.
(Unit: mm)
26
PART II
G730 Interface Unit
CQM1-G7M21
CQM1-G7N01
CQM1-G7N11
27
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section describes the general features, system configuration, and word allocation of the G730 Interface Units.
1-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
1-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
1-3
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
1-3-1
CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
1-3-2
G730 Remote Terminal (Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
29
Section 1-1
Features
1-1
Features
The CPU handles the Interface Units as I/O Units, thereby eliminating tedious
procedures. Using a G730 Interface Unit allows signals for remote I/O equipment, such as switches and lamps, to be handled and controlled by the G730
Remote Terminal.
The G730 Remote Terminal is a terminal block with added communications
functions. It is connected to remote I/O equipment and PCs. Connection to
the PC by a single pair of cables reduces wiring effort.
For more information about the G730 Remote Terminal, refer to the I/O Terminal Series Catalog (X044).
CQM1-G7M21 Master
Switch settings on the Master allow simultaneous connection of G730
Remote Terminals (Slaves) with up to 32 input points and 32 output points.
Up to two Expansion Masters can be connected to each Master (one system)
to permit control of up to 128 points.
Multiple Masters can be used.
Connection of multiple Masters in separate systems permits control within the
range permitted for the CPU.
The number of input points and output points can independently be switched
between 32 and 16.
The HOLD/HOLD OFF setting determines whether the signals into the CPU
are held (HOLD) or cleared (HOLD OFF) when a transmission error occurs.
CQM1-G7N@1 Expansion
Master
An Expansion Master is used if the Master alone does not allow connection of
sufficient points. The Expansion Masters are always connected in series with
the Master and up to two Expansion Masters can be connected to each Master.
Expansion Masters are available as Input Units (G7N11) and Output Units
(G7N01). Switch settings allow connection of G730 Remote Terminals
(Slaves) with up to 32 points.
The number of input points and output points can independently be switched
between 32 and 16 for both Input Units and Output Units.
30
Section 1-2
System Configuration
1-2
System Configuration
The following are CQM1H/CQM1 system configuration examples with G730
Interface Units.
Configuration with One Master
Master (32 input points/32 output points max.)
CQM1H/CQM1
RS-485, 200 m max.
G730-VI (input model)
Switch
Sensor
Note
G730-VO (output model)
Lamp
G730-RI (input model)
Switch
G730-RO (output model)
Valve
1. Switches on the Master allow input and output to be independently set to
2 words (32 points) or 1 word (16 points). Connect Slaves according to the
set number of points.
2. If both input and output are set to 2 words (32 points), up to eight Input
Units and eight Output Units can be connected, if 4-point Slaves are used.
31
Section 1-2
System Configuration
Configuration as a Single System with Expansion Masters
CQM1H/CQM1
Master (32 input points/32 output points max.)
Expansion Master Unit 1 (max. 32 input points or 32 output points)
Expansion Master Unit 2 (max. 32 input points or 32 output points)
RS-485, 200 m max.
G730-VI (input model)
Switch
Sensor
Note
G730-VO (output model)
Lamp
G730-RI (input model)
Switch
G730-RO (output model)
Valve
1. Use one Master in any system. The systems must be separated if multiple
Masters are used. (See page 33)
2. Up to two Expansion Masters can be connected to each Master.
3. When two Expansion Masters are used, set one as Unit 1 and the other as
Unit 2. The Slave address for Unit 2 can only be used for an 8-point or 16point Slave. It cannot be used for a 4-point Slave.
4. The combination of one Master with two Expansion Masters allows control
of up to 128 points.
5. The maximum number of connectable Slaves is 24 4-point Slaves and 4
8-point Slaves, making a total or 28 Units.
32
Section 1-2
System Configuration
Configuration as Multiple Systems
Master, System 1 (32 input points/32 output points max.)
Expansion Master Unit 1 (max. 32 input points or 32 output points)
Expansion Master Unit 2 (max. 32 input points or 32 output points)
Master, System 2 (32 input points/32 output points max.)
Expansion Master Unit 1 (max. 32 input points or 32 output points)
RS-485, 200 m max.
G730-VI (input model)
Switch
Sensor
G730-VI (input model)
Switch
Sensor
Note
G730-VO (output model)
Lamp
G730-VO (output model)
Lamp
G730-RI (input model) G730-RO (output model)
Switch
Valve
G730-RI (input model) G730-RO (output model)
Switch
Valve
1. When multiple Masters are used, allocate system numbers to them in sequence from 1, starting from the Master nearest the CPU. The system
numbers have no special significance. Refer to 4-1 Word Allocation.
2. Up to two Expansion Masters can be connected to each Master.
3. When two Expansion Masters are used, set one as Unit 1 and the other as
Unit 2. The Slave address for Unit 2 can only be used for an 8-point or 16point Slave. It cannot be used for a 4-point Slave.
4. Masters and Expansion Masters can be used in any combination, provided
that the maximum number of input and output points remains within the
range permitted for the CPU.
33
Section 1-3
Connecting Devices
1-3
1-3-1
Connecting Devices
CPU
The G730 Interface Unit connects to the following CPUs.
Name
CQM1H-series
CQM1-series
Model
Max. I/O Points (see note)
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
256 (16 words)
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
512 (32 words)
CQM1-CPU11-E
CQM1-CPU21-E
128 (8 words)
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
256 (16 words)
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
Note The number of points includes the CPU internal 16 input points (one word).
Therefore, the actual maximum numbers of points usable by the G730 Interface Unit are 112 points (7 words), 240 points (15 words), and 496 points (31
words) respectively.
1-3-2
G730 Remote Terminal (Slave)
The following G730 Remote Terminals can be connected to a G730 Interface
Unit.
Model
G730-RID04
Relay input (DC)
I/O type
G730-RIA04
G730-ROC04
Relay input (AC)
Relay output
I/O points
4
G730-ROC04-A Relay output (with error detection function)
G730-VID04
DC input, NPN (common +)
G730-VOD04
G730-ROC08
Transistor output, NPN (common –)
Relay output
G730-AOM08
G730-VID08
Relay output (power MOS FET)
DC input, NPN (common +)
G730-VID08-1
G730-VOD08
DC input, PNP (common –)
Transistor output, NPN (common –)
G730-VOD08-1
G730-ROC16
Transistor output, PNP (common +)
Relay output
G730-AOM16
G730-VID16
Relay output (power MOS FET)
DC input, NPN (common +)
G730-VOD16
Transistor output, NPN (common –)
8
16
For more information about the G730 Remote Terminal, refer to the I/O Terminal Series Catalog (X044).
34
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Settings
This section provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the G730 Interface Units.
2-1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
2-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
35
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1
Nomenclature
CQM1-G7M21 Master
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
+
–
Transmission Ready terminals
(Refer to 3-2 External Output
Connection Cables)
Terminals shorted while in transmission status with power on.
Read signal at CPU and confirm
transmission ready status before enabling data.
Refer to 4-2 Handling Power On.
The output from these terminals linked to ON/OFF status
of the T/R RDY indicator.
ALM output terminals
(Refer to 3-2 External Output
Connection Cables)
Terminals shorted if an error occurs in the output of a unit with
error detection function
(G730-ROC04-A).
Transmission terminal
(Refer to 3-1 Transmission Cables)
For connection of transmission
cable to Expansion Master or
Slave.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
Name
36
Color
Function
RDY
Unit Ready
Green
Lit when power is on and if CQM1H/
CQM1 recognizes a Master.
IN 1CH
IN Mode
Orange
Lit while number of inputs set to 1 word
(16 points). Not lit when set to 2 words
(32 points).
OUT 1CH
OUT Mode
Orange
Lit while number of outputs set to 1
word (16 points). Not lit when set to 2
words (32 points).
T/R RDY
Transmission
Ready
Green
HOLD
HOLD Setting
Orange
Lit while in transmission status with
power on. Not lit while in transmission
error.
Lit while DIP switch set to HOLD (data
held when a transmission error occurs).
T/R
Transmitting
Red
Flashes while searching for terminator
or during transmission with power
turned on. Lit when there is a transmission error. Not lit when there is an error
in the Master.
END
Terminator
Red
Lit when the power is turned on. Goes
out when the terminator is found.
Flashes when multiple terminators are
present.
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
Name
Slave Setting
Error
NODE
ALM
Slave Alarm
Color
Red
Function
Lit when Slave set to #28 to #30.
Flashes for other address setting error
(refer to Appendix B Troubleshooting
for details).
Red
Lit after error occurs with Slave output
(G730-ROC04-A).
Note ALM Output:
The Slave address and bit address cannot be checked after a failure occurs.
It is not possible to differentiate between Open and Short modes.
For more information about the G730 Remote Terminal, refer to the I/O Terminal Series Catalog (X044).
CQM1-G7N11 Input Master
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
+
–
+
–
Transmission terminal 1 (see page 44)
For connection of transmission cable from
Master or Expansion Master.
Transmission terminal 2 (see page 44)
For connection of transmission cable to next
Expansion Master or Slave.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
Name
Color
RDY
Unit Ready
Green
IN 1CH
IN Mode
Orange
ADR No.2
Unit 2
Orange
T/R
Transmitting
Red
Function
Lit when power is on and if CQM1H/
CQM1 recognizes a Master.
Lit while number of inputs set to 1 word
(16 points). Not lit when set to 2 words
(32 points).
Lit when Unit 2 set. Not lit when Unit 1
set.
Flashes during transmission with power
turned on. Lit when there is a transmission error. Not lit when there is an error
in the Expansion Master.
37
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
CQM1-G7N01 Output Master
Front View
Indicators (see following table)
+
–
+
–
Transmission terminal 1 (see page 44)
For connection of transmission cable from
Master or Expansion Master.
Transmission terminal 2 (see page 44)
For connection of transmission cable to next
Expansion Master or Slave.
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Indicators
RDY
Name
Unit Ready
Color
Green
OUT 1CH
OUT Mode
Orange
ADR No.2
Unit 2
Orange
T/R
Transmitting
Red
Function
Lit when power is on and if CQM1H/
CQM1 recognizes a Master.
Lit while number of outputs set to 1
word (16 points). Not lit when set to 2
words (32 points).
Lit when Unit 2 set. Not lit when Unit 1
set.
Flashes during transmission with power
turned on. Lit when there is a transmission error. Not lit when there is an error
in the Expansion Master.
Note The positive and negative terminals of the transmission terminals 1 and 2 are
shorted internally.
Transmission terminals 1 and 2 can be connected in any order.
38
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
2-2
Switch Settings
Remove the terminal block to expose the DIP switch underneath. Refer to the
CQM1H Operation Manual (W363) or the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226)
for the method of removing the terminal block.
Use a thin-tipped object, such as a small screwdriver, to set the switches.
DIP switch
CQM1-G7M21 Master
All pins are factory-set
to OFF
→
OFF↔ON
Pin 4
Not used (set to OFF).
Pin 3
HOLD/HOLD OFF Setting:
Sets the HOLD/HOLD OFF function. This setting determines whether the signal input status to the CPU is held when a transmission error occurs (HOLD)
or whether all input bits are cleared (HOLD OFF).
Pin 2
Setting
ON
Description
Signal input status held when a transmission error occurs (HOLD).
OFF
Signal input status cleared when a transmission error occurs (HOLD
OFF).
Output Word Setting:
Sets the number of output words (points) occupied at the Master.
Setting
Description
ON
One word (16 points) of outputs.
OFF
Pin 1
Two words (32 points) of outputs.
Input Word Setting:
Sets the number of input words (points) occupied at the Master.
Setting
ON
OFF
Note
Description
One word (16 points) of inputs.
Two words (32 points) of inputs.
1. Even when selected, the HOLD function does not operate in the following
cases:
Error in the Master (CPU out of control, HOLD inoperative for Master and
etc.)
Expansion Masters.
Error in Expansion Master (CPU out of HOLD operative for Master but inopercontrol, etc.)
ative for Expansion Masters.
Cable discontinuity between Master
and Expansion Master
Shorting in transmission route
39
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
2. Disconnection between Slaves:
HOLD operative for Slaves connected to Master. Inoperative for output
Slaves after the discontinuity. These statuses determined by the output
Slave HOLD/HOLD OFF setting.
CQM1-G7N11 Input Expansion Master
All pins are factory-set
to OFF
→
OFF↔ON
Pins 3 and 4
Not used (set to OFF).
Pin 2
Expansion Master Unit # Setting:
Sets the Expansion Master Unit Number
Setting
ON
Expansion Master is Unit 2
OFF
Pin 1
Description
Expansion Master is Unit 1
Input Word Setting:
Sets the number of input words (points) occupied at the Expansion Master.
Setting
Description
ON
One word (16 points) of inputs.
OFF
Note
Two words (32 points) of inputs.
1. Turn the CQM1H/CQM1 power off before setting the DIP switch. The
switch settings are enabled when the CQM1H/CQM1 power is turned on.
2. Use a different Unit number for each of the two Expansion Masters used
with a single Master.
3. Slave address for Unit 2 can only be used for an 8-point or 16-point Slave.
It cannot be used for a 4-point Slave.
CQM1-G7N01 Output Expansion Master
All pins are factory-set
to OFF
→
OFF↔ON
Pins 3 and 4
Not used (set to OFF).
Pin 2
Expansion Master Unit # Setting:
Sets the Expansion Master Unit Number
Setting
ON
Expansion Master is Unit 2
OFF
40
Expansion Master is Unit 1
Description
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
Pin 1
Output Word Setting:
Sets the number of output words (points) occupied at the Expansion Master.
Setting
Description
ON
One word (16 points) of outputs.
OFF
Note
Two words (32 points) of outputs.
1. Turn the CQM1H/CQM1 power off before setting the DIP switch. The
switch settings are enabled when the CQM1H/CQM1 power is turned on.
2. Use a different Unit number for each of the two Expansion Masters used
with a single Master.
3. Slave address for Unit 2 can only be used for an 8-point or 16-point Slave.
It cannot be used for a 4-point Slave.
41
SECTION 3
Connections
This section describes the connections between the G730 Interface Units and G730 Remote Terminals.
3-1
Transmission Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
3-2
External Output Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
43
Section 3-1
Transmission Cables
3-1
Transmission Cables
Connect wiring in series from the Master, with positive terminals connected
together and negative terminals connected together.
Set the last connected Slave as the terminator. Do not set an intermediate
Slave as a terminator.
Total cable length per system: 200 m max.
The size of terminal screw differs for the Master and Slave. Consider the size
of the terminal screws when using solderless terminals.
Master terminal: M3 (optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m); Slave terminal:
M3.5 (optimum tightening torque: 0.8 N • m)
Locate transmission cables away from power cables and high-voltage cables
to eliminate the effects of noise.
Recommended Cables
The G730 Interface Unit can be connected to the G730 Remote Terminal
using the following cable.
Cable: VCTF 0.75 x 2C
Master to Slave
Connection
The connection method of a Master to Slaves is shown in the diagram below.
G730 Interface Unit
Master
G730 Remote Terminal
Slave
−
+
G730 Remote Terminal
Slave
+ −
+
−
Terminal screws: M3.5
Set as terminator.
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.8 N • m)
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Master and Expansion
Master to Slave
Connection
The connection method of a Master and Expansion Master to Slaves is shown
in the following diagram.
Connect wiring of each system in series from Master, Expansion Master to
Slave with positive terminals connected together and negative terminals connected together.
Expansion Master terminals B0 to B2 and B1 to B3 are shorted internally.
They can be used in any combination.
Set the last connected Slave as the terminator. Do not set an intermediate
Slave as a terminator.
Total cable length per system: 200 m max.
The size of terminal screw differs for the Master/Expansion Master and Slave.
Consider the size of the terminal screws when using crimped terminals.
Master/Expansion Master terminal: M3; Slave terminal: M3.5
44
Section 3-2
External Output Connection Cables
Locate transmission cables away from power cables and high-voltage cables
to eliminate the effects of noise.
G730 Interface Unit
Master
+
–
G730 Interface Unit Expansion Master
G730 Interface Unit Expansion Master
*1
*1
+
–
+
–
+
–
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening
torque: 0.5 N • m)
G730 Remote Terminal
Slave
+
–
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening
torque: 0.5 N • m)
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening
torque: 0.5 N • m)
G730 Remote Terminal
Slave
+ –
–
Set as terminator.
3-2
+
Terminal screws: M3.5
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.8 N • m)
External Output Connection Cables
The G730 Interface Unit Master relay contact external outputs are the Transmission Ready output and ALM output.
Recommended Cables
The external outputs can be connected using the following cable.
Cable: AWG22 to 18 (0.3 to 0.75 mm2)
45
Section 3-2
External Output Connection Cables
Connections
Transmission Ready terminals are shorted when Transmission Ready status
occurs.
Example of external
output connections
Transmission Ready output/ALM output
Max. switching capacity: 24 VDC/2 A
Min. switching capacity: 5 VDC/10 mA
G730 Interface Unit
Master
to CQM1H/CQM1 Input Unit, etc.
Transmission
Ready output
Emergency stop circuit
Power
supply
To system control circuit
ALM output
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
The ALM output terminals are shorted if an error occurs in the output of a Unit
with error detection function (G730-ROC04-A).
46
SECTION 4
Operation
This section provides the operational procedures for the G730 Interface Unit.
4-1
Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
4-1-1
CQM1H/CQM1 Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
4-1-2
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
4-1-3
G730 Remote Terminal Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
4-1-4
Word Allocation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
4-2
Handling Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
4-3
Transmission Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
47
Section 4-1
Word Allocation
4-1
4-1-1
Word Allocation
CQM1H/CQM1 Word Allocation
Number of I/O Words
The number of I/O words for the G730 Interface Unit Master and Expansion
Master can be switched between 1 word and 2 words using the DIP switch.
The number of I/O words set affects the word allocations and number of connected Slaves. Set the required number of words to suit the Slave I/O type,
number of points, and number of Units.
Unit Number of Expansion
Master
Up to two Expansion Masters can be connected to each Master. Set a unique
Unit number for each Expansion Master using the DIP switch. Either Expansion Master can be set as Unit 2, but a Slave address for Unit 2 can only be
used for an 8-point or 16-point Slave. It cannot be used for a 4-point Slave.
If only one Expansion Master is used, set it as Unit 1.
Word Allocation
Word addresses are allocated sequentially from left to right to all I/O and other
mounted units, starting from 001 for inputs (000 is the CPU internal input) and
from 100 for outputs, independent of the Master and Expansion Master Unit
number.
In multiple systems (using multiple Masters), the word addresses are allocated to the inputs and outputs sequentially from the leftmost mounted unit,
independent of the system number.
DIP Switch
Set the DIP switch before turning the CQM1H/CQM1 power on. The switch
settings are enabled when the CQM1H/CQM1 power is turned on.
Master
(G7M21)
Set OFF
HOLD function setting
Number of output
words setting
Number of input words setting
ON: 1 word (16 points)
OFF: 2 words (32 points)
Expansion Master
(G7N11)
Expansion Master
(G7N01)
Set OFF
ON: Unit 2
Unit # setting
OFF: Unit 1
Number of input words setting
ON: 1 word (16 points)
OFF: 2 words (32 points)
Set OFF
ON: Unit 2
OFF: Unit 1
Number of output words setting
ON: 1 word (16 points)
OFF: 2 words (32 points)
Unit # setting
All pins are factory-set to OFF.
Example of Number of I/O
Words and Unit No.
Settings
48
The mounting positions of the Master and Expansion Master are not specified
but the wiring must be connected in the order: Master to Expansion Master to
Slave. The I/O addresses are allocated sequentially in the order the Units are
mounted (refer to 4-1-2 Precautions).
Section 4-1
Word Allocation
The Slave address for Unit 2 can only be used for an 8-point or 16-point Slave.
It cannot be used for a 4-point Slave.
Master (G7M21)
Expansion Master (G7N01)
Expansion Master (G7N11)
Number inputs: 2 words
Number of outputs: 2 words
Set as Unit 1
Number of outputs: 1 word
Set as Unit 2
Number of inputs: 1 word
System 1
→
Number of output
words setting
Number of input
words setting
Unit # setting
Number of output
words setting
→
Master (G7M21)
Expansion Master (G7N11)
Number inputs: 2 words
Number of outputs: 1 word
Set as Unit 1
Number of inputs: 1 word
→
Unit # setting
Number of input
words setting
System 2
Unit # setting
Number of input
words setting
→
System 1
CQM1H/CQM1
System 2
Master
Expansion Master
Unit 2
Expansion Master
Unit 1
16
16
points points
Master
I/O Output Input I/O Input
Expansion Master
Unit 1
→
Number of output
words setting
Number of input
words setting
Unit
Input word
Output
word
4-1-2
Precautions
Avoid the following cases, which lead to complex word allocation and wiring
connections.
Expansion Master Unit No. Out of Mounting Order
Take care of the allocation of Expansion Master Unit 1 and Unit 2 word
addresses.
If one Expansion Master is used for input and another for output, take care
that the Expansion Master Unit numbers and the Unit 1/Unit 2 Slave address
settings are not reversed.
A 4-point Slave cannot be used as a Unit 2 Slave address.
49
Section 4-1
Word Allocation
Connect the transmission cables in series from the Master, regardless of the
Unit number settings.
CQM1H/CQM1
Expansion Master
Unit 1
Expansion Master
Unit 2
16
16
points points
Master
I/O Input Input
Unit
Input word
Output
word
Expansion Masters Mounted Left of the Master
Take care of the allocation of Master, Expansion Master Unit 1 and Unit 2
word addresses.
If one Expansion Master is used for input and another for output, take care
that the Expansion Master Unit numbers and the Unit 1/Unit 2 Slave address
settings are not reversed.
A 4-point Slave cannot be used as a Unit 2 Slave address.
Connect the transmission cables in series from the Master.
CQM1H/CQM1
Unit
Input word
Output
word
50
Master
Expansion Master
Unit 2
16
16
points points
Expansion Master
Unit 1
Input Output I/O
Section 4-1
Word Allocation
Additional Unit Mounted Between Master and Expansion Master or
Between Two Expansion Masters
Take care of the allocation of Expansion Master word addresses.
Expansion Master
Unit 1
16
16
points points
Master
I/O Output
Input
16
points
Expansion Master
Unit 2
CQM1H/CQM1
Unit
Input word
Output
word
Master of Another System is Mounted Between the Master and
Expansion Master or Between Two Expansion Masters of a System
Take care that the transmission cables of System 1 and System 2 are not
wired together. Each system must be wired separately.
Expansion Master
Unit 2
Master
16
16
points points
Expansion Master
Unit 1
CQM1H/CQM1
Master
System 1 System 2
System 1
I/O Output
Input
Unit
Input word
Output
word
4-1-3
G730 Remote Terminal Allocation
Slave Address Allocation
Using one Master and two Expansion Masters in one system allows the connection of up to 28 Slaves (G730 Remote Terminals).
Use the DIP switch to set the Slave address for each Slave to a value from #0
to #27. Addresses #24 to #27 cannot be set for 4-point Slaves. The Master
and Expansion Masters recognize the controlled Slave by the Slave address.
51
Section 4-1
Word Allocation
Relationship Between
Master/Expansion Masters
and Slave Address
Master/
Expansion
Master
Master
I/O type
Output
The Slave addresses corresponding (i.e. controlled by) each Master/Expansion Master are shown in the table below.
The Slave addresses corresponding to each Master and Expansion Master
Unit number are fixed.
Word
n
n+1
Input
m
m+1
Expansion Mas- Input
ter, Unit 1
(Output)
j
j+1
Expansion Mas- Input
ter, Unit 2
(Output)
k
k+1
Note
4-point Slave
Address
Bit
8-point Slave
Address
Bit
#0
#1
00 to 03
04 to 07
#0
00 to 07
#2
#3
08 to 11
12 to 15
#2
08 to 15
#4
#5
00 to 03
04 to 07
#4
00 to 07
#6
#7
08 to 11
12 to 15
#6
08 to 15
#8
#9
00 to 03
04 to 07
#8
00 to 07
#10
#11
08 to 11
12 to 15
#10
08 to 15
#12
#13
00 to 03
04 to 07
#12
00 to 07
#14
#15
08 to 11
12 to 15
#14
08 to 15
#16
#17
00 to 03
04 to 07
#16
00 to 07
#18
#19
08 to 11
12 to 15
#18
08 to 15
#20
#21
00 to 03
04 to 07
#20
00 to 07
#22
#23
08 to 11
12 to 15
#22
08 to 15
#24
#25
#26
#27
Expansion Master Unit 2 is
for 8-/16-point Slaves only.
Do not set 4-point Slaves
between #24 and #27.
16-point Slave
Address
Bit
#0
00 to 15
#4
00 to 15
#8
00 to 15
#12
00 to 15
#16
00 to 15
#20
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
#24
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
#26
00 to 15
1. Addresses n,m,j,k are the start addresses allocated in CQM1H/CQM1 for
the Master or Expansion Master, as shown above.
2. Expansion Master Unit 2 is for 8-/16-point Slaves only. Do not set 4-point
Slave addresses between #24 and #27.
3. If the number of I/O words for the Master and Expansion Master is set to 1
word (16 points), the corresponding Slave address (n+1), (m+1), (j+1),
(k+1) (the shaded areas) are invalid. An error results if these settings are
incorrect. In particular, if the Master output is set to 1 word but the output
Slave address is mistakenly set between #4 and #7, the Slave outputs the
same data as the n address. All Slave outputs corresponding to the Expansion Master are OFF (0).
4. The following bits are allocated as Master and Expansion Master addresses and cannot be used by the Slaves.
Input bits: always OFF
Output bits: can be used as work bits
52
Section 4-1
Word Allocation
4-1-4
Word Allocation Example
In this example, the Master and output Expansion Master Unit 1 are set to 2
words and the Slaves comprise five 16-point Units and two 4-point Units. The
Slave I/O bit addresses corresponding to Unit I/O words and Slave address
allocations are shown in the table below.
I/O type
Output
Input
CPU internal
input word
Master
word
Slave address
Expansion
Master Unit 1
word
Slave address
---
100
#0 (16-point output model)
102
#16, #17 (two 4-point Output Units)
#4 (16-point output model)
#8 (16-point input model)
103
---
#20 (16-point Output Unit)
000
101
001
002
#12 (16-point input model)
In the following example, the Slaves are connected in order of ascending
Slave address. However, the connection order is independent of the Slave
address. The only requirement is that they are connected in series.
Set the Slave connected at the end as the terminator, regardless of its Slave
address.
Master (I/O set to 2 words)
Expansion Master Unit 1
(output set to 2 words)
CQM1H/CQM1
#0
Word 100
16-point
output
Bit address (OUT)
10000 to 10015
RS-485 total length 200 m
#4
Word 101
16-point
output
Bit address (OUT)
10100 to 10115
Set as terminator
#8
Word 001
16-point
input
Bit address (IN)
00100 to 00115
#12
Word 002
4-point #20
4-point #17
16-point #16
output
input
Word 102 output Word 103
Word 102
Bit address (IN)
00200 to 00215
Bit address (OUT) Bit address (OUT)
10200 to 10203
10204 to 10207
16-point
output
Bit address (OUT)
10300 to 10315
53
Section 4-2
Handling Power On
4-2
Handling Power On
After the power is turned on, the Master takes several seconds to recognize
all the Slaves. To start operation immediately at power on, write a program for
CQM1H/CQM1 to read the Transmission Ready signal and to wait until the
Transmission Ready signal turns ON.
The Master Transmission Ready signal is connected to CPU internal input bit
00000 and is used as a virtual flag by the Output Ready flag in the work bits
(02000).
Program Example
Transmission
Ready output
Output Ready
flag
00000
02000
MOV(21)
DM0000
100
The contents of DM 0000 is output to the Slave at address 100 when the Output Ready flag and the Transmission Ready signal from the Master are ON
simultaneously.
Connection Example
G730-VO (output type)
CQM1H/CQM1
Master
#0
Word 100
+
–
24 VDC
Transmission
Ready output
Note It takes 1 s max. for the Transmission Ready output to turn OFF after a transmission error occurs during normal operation.
On a transmission error, the CPU input and Slave output is determined by the
HOLD function setting of each Unit.
4-3
Transmission Delay Time
The transmission delay time arises because the G730 Interface Unit communications is conducted by polling from the Master to the Expansion Masters
and Slaves.
The maximum transmission delay time (Tmax) is calculated using the following formula.
Calculation of
Transmission Delay Time
Maximum transmission delay time (Tmax):
Tmax = ((no. Slaves + no. Expansion Masters + 2) x 1.2 x 2) + Slave I/O ON/
OFF delay time (ms)
This calculation does not include the response times between the CQM1H/
CQM1 and units.
54
Section 4-3
Transmission Delay Time
Refer to the CQM1H Operation Manual (W363) or the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226) for details about the CQM1H/CQM1 and unit response times.
Refer to I/O Terminal Series Catalog (X044) for details about the Slave I/O
ON/OFF delay times.
For the system shown in the word allocation example on page 53, the time
(Tmax) between the input type Slave input signal turning ON, being read by
the Slave, and then being read by CQM1H/CQM1 from the Master is calculated as follows (assuming the Slave input ON delay time is 1.5 ms.).
Example calculation of transmission delay time:
The maximum transmission delay time (Tmax) for a system comprising seven
Slaves and one Expansion Master is Tmax = (7+1+2) x 1.2 x 2 + 1.5 = 25.5
ms.
Reducing Transmission
Delay Time
The transmission delay time can be reduced by replacing a large system
using multiple Expansion Masters with multiple Masters configured as separate systems.
Unit 1
Unit 2
Expansion Master
IN
Expansion Master
OUT
Master
Existing System
Input Slaves 16 x 4-point,
total 64 points
4-point
input
Slave
4-point
input
Slave
Output Slaves 8 x 4-point +
4 x 8-point, total 64 points
4-point
input
Slave
4-point
output
Slave
4-point
output
Slave
8-point
output
Slave
Transmission delay time (Slave I/O delay time = 1.5 ms)
Tmax = ((28+2+2) x 1.2 x 2 ) + 1.5 = 78.3 ms
Modified System
Master
System 1
Input Slaves 8 x 4-point,
total 32 points
4-point
input
Slave
4-point
input
Slave
Output Slaves 4 x 4-point +
2 x 8-point, total 32 points
4-point
input
Slave
4-point
output
Slave
4-point
output
Slave
8-point
output
Slave
Master
System 2
Input Slaves 8 x 4-point,
total 32 points
4-point
input
Slave
4-point
input
Slave
Output Slaves 4 x 4-point +
2 x 8-point, total 32 points
4-point
input
Slave
4-point
output
Slave
4-point
output
Slave
8-point
output
Slave
Transmission delay time (Slave I/O delay time = 1.5 ms)
Tmax = ((14+0+2) x 1.2 x 2 ) + 1.5 = 39.9 ms
Using one 16-point Unit instead of two 8-point Units reduces the number of
Units, and therefore decreases the transmission delay time.
55
Appendix A
Specifications
Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the G730 Interface Units conform to those of the CQM1H/CQM1 PC.
Communications Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
Communications method
Synchronization method
Two-wire, semi-duplex
Start-stop
Transmission path
Interface
2-core cable (VCTF 0.75 X 2 C is recommended)
RS-485
Transmission speed
Transmission distance
187.5 kbps
200 m max (total per system)
Performance Specifications - Master
CQM1-G7M21
Item
Internal current consumption
Specification
Input: 2 words (32 points)/1 word (16 points)
Output: 2 words (32 points)/1 word (16 points)
Set with DIP switch.
Transmission Ready output: G6D, SPST-NO, 24 VDC/2 A max.
ALM output
250 mA at 5 VDC
Weight
Dimensions
250 g max.
32 (W) x 110 (H) x 107 (D) mm
I/O points
External output
Performance Specifications - Input Expansion Master
CQM1-G7N11
Item
Internal current consumption
Specification
Input: 2 words (32 points)/1 word (16 points)
Output: 2 words (32 points)/1 word (16 points)
Set with DIP switch.
80 mA at 5 VDC
Weight
Dimensions
200 g max.
32 (W) x 110 (H) x 107 (D) mm
I/O points
Performance Specifications - Output Expansion Master
CQM1-G7N01
Item
I/O points
Specification
Input: 2 words (32 points)/1 word (16 points)
Output: 2 words (32 points)/1 word (16 points)
Set with DIP switch.
Internal current consumption
Weight
80 mA at 5 VDC
200 g max.
Dimensions
32 (W) x 110 (H) x 107 (D) mm
57
Appendix A
Specifications
Dimensions
Common for Master and Expansion Master.
Unit: mm
58
Appendix B
Troubleshooting
Indicator Status During Normal Operation
❍: Lit, ▲: Flashing, X: Not lit
Master
RDY
❍
T/R
RDY
❍
T/R
▲
Expansion
Master
END
NODE
X
X
ALM
RDY
❍
X
T/R
▲
Slave
PWR
❍
Comments
T/R
▲
All T/R indicators flash.
Any other indicator display indicates an error. Refer to the table below.
Indicator Alarm Table
The table below shows the description and remedy of an error occurring in the G730 Interface Unit.
❍: Lit, ▲: Flashing, X: Not lit, “––”: Status not relevant.
Error
Master
RDY
Errors
before or
after normal operation
Errors
before
normal
operation
X
T/R
RDY
––
T/R
––
Expansion
Master
END
NODE
ALM
––
––
–
RDY
X
Description
Remedy
T/R
––
Power not turned on.
Turn the power on.
Units not completely connected. Refer to unit manual and correct
End cover not attached.
set up.
––
X
X
X
X
X
––
––
Abnormal Master.
Turn power off and back on.
Replace Master if same error reoccurs.
❍
X
▲
❍
❍X
––
❍
❍
Slave address set between #28
and #30.
Set Slave address between #0
and #27.
❍
X
▲
❍
X
––
❍
❍
No terminator set.
Set the Slave connected at the
end as the terminator.
Multiple terminators exists in a
system.
Only one terminator allowed per
system. Wire separate systems
with one Master each.
Different types of communications Master exist.
Do not mix Master (G7M21) with
different types of communications Master.
Transmission path shorted.
Transmission path discontinuity.
Transmission path + and –
wiring reversed.
Correctly wire the transmission
path.
Expansion Masters exist with
the same input/output type and
duplicate unit #.
Correct settings to give unique
unit # and Slave address.
Expansion Masters exist with
the same input/output type and
duplicate system address.
❍
X
▲
▲
X
––
❍
❍
The Slave set as terminator is
not turned on.
Turn on the terminator Slave.
The terminator is set to Slave
address #31.
Set terminator Slave address
between #0 and #27.
Multiple terminators set
Set only the final Slave to terminator.
59
Appendix B
Troubleshooting
Error
Master
RDY
Errors
before
normal
operation
❍
T/R
RDY
❍
T/R
▲
Expansion
Master
END
NODE
ALM
X
▲
––
RDY
❍
Description
Remedy
T/R
▲
Input/output type of Master/
Expansion Master differs from
input/output type of the corresponding Slave.
Match input/output type of Master/Expansion Master to input/
output type of the corresponding
Slave.
Expansion Masters exist with
different input/output type but
duplicate unit #.
Expansion Masters exist with
different input/output type but
duplicate Slave address.
Correct settings to give unique
unit # and Slave address.
A 4-point unit is set between #24 The #24 to #27 area is reserved
and #27.
for 8-point and 16-point units.
Set 4-point units between #0
and #23.
Transmission to Slaves whose addresses
are set correctly is possible for this display status. Slaves with errors can be
identified by checking the T/R indicators,
which will be lit on Slaves with errors.
The Slave address of an 8-point
unit is set to an odd value
between #0 and #23.
The Slave address of a 16-point
unit is set to an odd value
between #0 and #27.
Refer to Word Allocations and
correct the Slave address.
Duplicate bit addresses set for
4-, 8-, and 16-point units.
Errors
after normal operation
❍
❍
❍
X
❍
▲
X
X
––
X
––
❍
❍
❍
❍▲
Transmission path shorted.
Transmission path discontinuity.
X
Power off at Slave.
Turn on the Slave power supply.
Slave CPU out of control
Turn Slave power off and back
on. Replace Slave if same error
re-occurs.
Error occurred in the output of a
Slave with error detection function.
Replace defective relay or normally return load line.
▲
Correctly wire the transmission
path.
Note The error check shown in the table above is conducted when the CQM1H/CQM1 is turned on (even if the
CQM1H/CQM1 is not in RUN mode). The indicator display on the CQM1H/CQM1 CPU is unrelated to
the indicator display on the G730 Interface Unit.
System Error
The error shown below is a CQM1H/CQM1 error which prevents CQM1H/CQM1 operation.
Error
Description
Cause
Remedy
I/O Unit overflow An I/O overflow error occurred in The total number of I/O words in
the CPU.
the system exceeds the maximum I/O words of the CPU.
Correct the system, referring to
1-2 System Configuration and
4-1 Word Allocation.
Operation Flowchart and Indicator Status
The indicator status are shown below after CQM1H/CQM1 power on, during normal operation, and after an
error.
Status
Master
RDY
CQM1H/CQM1 power on
X
CQM1H/CQM1 initial check OK
❍
G730 transmission line check – terminator found
❍*
Note *Normal operation status
60
T/R
RDY
X
T/R
END
Expansion
Master
NODE
X
ALM
X
RDY
X
T/R
X
X
X
X
▲
❍
X
X
❍
X
❍*
▲*
X*
X*
X*
❍*
▲*
Appendix B
Troubleshooting
Errors
Master
RDY
T/R
RDY
T/R
END
Expansion
Master
NODE
ALM
RDY
T/R
I/O word setting error
I/O unit overflow
Defective CQM1H/CQM1 unit connection
No end cover CQM1H/CQM1 initial check NG
X*
––
––
––
––
––
X
––
Master unit error
––
X
X
X
X
X
––
––
Slave set between #28 and #30.
❍
X**
▲
❍**
❍**(X)
––
❍
❍**
Incorrect transmission path setting.
❍
X**
▲
❍**
X
––
❍
❍**
Terminator not turned on.
❍
X**
▲
❍**
X
––
❍
❍**
Duplicate terminator setting.
❍
X**
▲
▲**
X
––
❍
❍**
Duplicate Expansion Master Unit #.
Slave address setting error
❍
❍
X**
❍
▲
▲
❍**
X
X**
▲
––
❍
❍
❍**
▲
Transmission path shorted/discontinuity
❍
X**
❍**
X
––
––
❍
❍**(▲)
Slave power off/CPU out of control
❍
X**
❍**
X
––
––
❍
X**
Output error from Slave with error detection function.
❍
❍
▲
X
X
❍**
❍
▲
Note Indicators shown with “**” differ from normal status.
61
PART III
I/O Link Unit
CQM1-LK501
63
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section describes the general features, system configuration, and word allocation of the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit.
1-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
1-3
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
1-3-1
CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
1-3-2
Remote I/O Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
1-4
66
Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
1-4-1
CQM1H/CQM1 Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
1-4-2
Master Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
65
Section 1-1
Features
1-1
Features
• The CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit can communicate with other PCs via I/O
points connected to the SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote I/O System.
• The CPU treats the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit as an I/O Unit with 32
input and 32 output points so that the user can communicate with remote
PCs with ease.
The SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote I/O System connects remote I/O devices
and PCs. The SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote I/O System saves wiring effort
because each PC is connected over a single wire. The CQM1-LK501 I/O Link
Unit makes PC communications possible via I/O points in the SYSMAC BUS
Wired Remote I/O System. Refer to SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs Wired
Remote System Manual (W120) for details on the SYSMAC BUS system.
1-2
System Configuration
The following is a CQM1H/CQM1 system configuration example with CQM1LK501 I/O Link Units.
Remote I/O Master
PC (Master)
2-core cable
SYSMAC BUS system
200 m max.
CQM1H/CQM1
CQM1H/CQM1
Other slave
CQM1-LK501
I/O Link Unit
1-3
1-3-1
CQM1-LK501
I/O Link Unit
Connecting Devices
CPU
The CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit connects to the following CPUs
Name
CQM1H-series CPU
Model
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CQM1-series CPU
66
CQM1-CPU11-E
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
Section 1-4
Word Allocation
1-3-2
Remote I/O Master
The CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit connects to the following SYSMAC BUS Master Units.
Model
1-4
PC
C500-RM201
C2000H
C1000H (F)
C500 (F)
CV2000
CV1000
CV500
CVM1
C200H-RM201
C200H/C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE
Word Allocation
The CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit is allocated two output and two input words.
Master
CQM1H/CQM1
Master's area
CQM1H/CQM1's area
SYSMAC BUS
communication
1-4-1
For input (reading)
For output (writing)
For output (writing)
For input (reading)
CQM1H/CQM1 Word Allocation
The CQM1H/CQM1 treats the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit as an I/O Unit with
two output and two input words, to which words are allocated from the left for
both input and output. Words from 000 are allocated for input and words from
100 are allocated for output.
67
Section 1-4
Word Allocation
1-4-2
Master Word Allocation
The Master treats the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit as a SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O Slave Unit. Words are allocated to the SYSMAC BUS area and specified
by the Master in the same way as other SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave
Units. All words to be used in the SYSMAC BUS area are set using the DIP
switch of the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit as shown in the following figure.
CQM1-LK501 I/O Link
Unit's DIP switch
Master's SYSMAC BUS area
Example
24
0
23
24
→
22
Corresponds to each
binary digit
ON = 1, OFF = 0
31
22 x 0 + 23 x 1 + 24 x 1 = 24
Offset address
First offset address 24
The first word of the Master’s SYSMAC BUS area varies with the model as
seen in the following table.
Model
68
SYSMAC BUS area first word
C200H/C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE
Word 200
C500 (F)
C1000H (F)
C2000H
CV2000
CV1000
CV500
CVM1
Word 0
Word 32x (Master base number)
Word 2300 + 32x (Master base number)
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Settings
This section provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit.
2-1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
2-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
69
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1
Nomenclature
Indicators (see table)
Transmission terminal 1
(refer to 3-1 SYSMAC BUS Cable
Connections.)
Transmission terminal 2
(refer to 3-1 SYSMAC BUS Cable
Connections.)
Operation output terminals
Operation output terminals must be short-circuited if transmission is normal when the Master
is in operating mode. These terminals are used to
retrieve signals from the Master in operation.
Terminal screws: M3
Note To satisfy the EC directives (low-voltage
directives), provide reinforced insulation
or double insulation for the power supply.
Indicators
Name
RDY
RUN
Color
Green
Green
ERR T/ Red
R
Function
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is supplied with power.
Lit when the Master is in operating mode.
Lit when there is a transmission error. Flashes during normal transmission.
The terminator setting switch and DIP switch are located under the terminal
board.
The ERR T/R indicator is lit only when there is an error is and will flash automatically when the transmission returns to normal.
70
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
2-2
Switch Settings
There is a terminator setting switch and DIP switch under the terminal board.
To disconnect the terminal board, refer to the CQM1H Operation Manual
(W363) or the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226). Use a small flat-blade screwdriver for setting the terminator setting switch and DIP switch.
Terminator Setting Switch
The terminator setting switch of the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit mounted to
the CQM1H/CQM1 located at the end of the SYSMAC BUS system must be
set to ON.
Master
SYSMAC BUS system
Other Slave
CQM1H/CQM1 (1)
CQM1H/CQM1 (2)
Set the terminator setting
switch of the CQM1-LK501 I/O
Link Unit mounted to this
CQM1H/CQM1 to ON.
Terminator setting switch
DIP switch (with output hold setting pin)
Output Hold Setting Pin
If this pin is set to OFF, when an error has occurred, the CQM1H/CQM1’s output word (i.e., the Master’s write word) will hold the value just before the error
has occurred. If this pin is set to ON, the value will be cleared.
DIP switch
Output hold setting pin:
Word setting pins
(see table below)
→
Word Setting
Switch
3 (x 24)
0
0
0
0
2 (x 23)
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Output
Words
+0, 1
Words
+4, 5
Input
Words
+2, 3
Words
+6, 7
2
1 (x 2 )
Word allocation
of Master
Setting
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Words
+8, 9
Words
+12, 13
Words
+16, 17
Words
+20, 21
Words
+24, 25
Words
+28, 29
Words
+10, 11
Words
+14, 15
Words
+18, 19
Words
+22, 23
Words
+26, 27
Words
+30, 31
71
Switch Settings
Section 2-2
Example
If pins 1 and 2 are set to OFF and pin 3 is set to ON on the CQM1-LK501 I/O
Link Unit, and the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit is connected to the C200H
Remote I/O Master, the following words will be allocated on the C200H.
Output: words 216 and 217
Input: words 218 and 219
72
SECTION 3
Connections
This section describes the SYSMAC BUS cable connections for the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit.
3-1
SYSMAC BUS Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
73
Section 3-1
SYSMAC BUS Cable Connections
3-1
SYSMAC BUS Cable Connections
Connect VCTF 0.75 x 2 C SYSMAC BUS cables to the CQM1-LK501 I/O LInk
Unit as shown in the following.
Connect the positive signal line
from the Master.
B
A0 0
B
A1 1
B
A2 2
B
A3 3
B4
Connect the negative signal line
from the Master.
Connect the positive signal line to
the next Slave (see note).
Connect the negative signal line to
the next Slave (see note).
Note Nothing is connected to these terminals in the case of the terminator.
Connect the Master and Slaves as described in the following.
The positive terminal of the Master must be connected to the positive terminal
of the Slave and the negative terminal of the Master must be connected to the
negative terminal of the Slave, and between Slaves, the positive terminals
must be connected together and the negative terminals must be connected
together as shown in the above diagram.
The end Slave of the system must be the terminator of the system. Any other
Slave must not be the terminator.
CQM1-LK501 I/O LInk Unit
Remote I/O Master
+
–
+
Other Slave
–
+
+
–
Terminator setting
–
Note
74
1. Connect the terminals with crimp-style terminals and M3 terminal screws
that are also used for CQM1H/CQM1 I/O Units.
2. Terminals B0 and B2 are short-circuited internally. Terminals B1 and B3 are
also short-circuited internally.
3. Be sure to turn all the Slaves on before turning on the Master. Any Slave
turned on after the Master is turned on will not be recognized by the Master.
SYSMAC BUS Cable Connections
Section 3-1
4. To satisfy the EC directives (low-voltage directives), provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the power supply when RUN OUTPUT is
used.
75
Appendix A
Specifications
Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the CQM1-LK501 I/O Link Unit conform to those of the CQM1H/CQM1 PC.
SYSMAC BUS Standard Specifications
Item
Transmission method
Time-division multiplex cyclic
Specification
Communication method
Transmission path
Two-wire semi-duplex
2-core cable (VCTF 0.75 x 2 C is recommended)
Interface
Transmission speed
RS-485
187.5k bps
Transmission distance
200 m max.
Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
Name
I/O Link Unit
Model
Current consumption
CQM1-LK501
150 mA at 5 VDC
I/O delay
I/O points
8 ms/64 points
64 points (32 input points and 32 output points)
External output
Diagnostic function
Operating output: G6D, SPST-NO, 2 A max.
• Transmission error check (BCC + inverted double transmission collation)
• CPU error monitor
• Transmission path error check
Weight
Dimensions
220 g max.
32 x 110 x 107 (W x H x D)
77
Specifications
Appendix A
Dimensions
These dimensions are the same for all G730 Interface Unit models.
(Unit: mm)
78
PART IV
Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply Units
CQM1-AD041
CQM1-IPS01
CQM1-IPS02
79
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section provides the features and system configuration relating to the Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply
Units.
1-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
1-1-1
Analog Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
1-1-2
Analog Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
1-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
1-3
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
1-4
1-3-1
CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
1-3-2
Analog Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
System Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
1-4-1
Total Number of I/O Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
1-4-2
Total Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
81
Section 1-1
Features
1-1
Features
Analog Input Unit
Analog Power Supply Unit
1-1-1
Analog Input Unit
• The CQM1-AD041 is a SYSMAC CQM1H/CQM1-series Analog Input Unit
that converts analog signals into digital signals.
• A single Analog Input Unit converts 4-point analog input into 12-bit digital
output. It is possible to reduce the number of input words that the Analog
Input Unit occupies by limiting the number of the Analog Input Unit’s input
points to a maximum of two. Refer to page 87 DIP Switch Functions for
details.
• Converted data is stored in the input word allocated to the Analog Input
Unit. The converted data is used by just reading the contents of the input
word. Refer to 3-2-1 Word Allocation for details.
• The Analog Input Unit has input signal voltage ranges of –10 to 10 V, 0 to
10 V, and 1 to 5V, any of which can be combined freely with the CQM1AD041’s input signal current range of 4 to 20 mA.
• The Analog Input Unit incorporates a mean value processing function so
that it outputs stable conversion data.
• The Analog Input Unit incorporates a broken wire detecting function, with
which the Analog Input Unit detects the disconnection of any input wire
that has been connected to the Analog Input Unit given the input range is
4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V.
1-1-2
Analog Power Supply Units
• The CQM1-IPS01 and CQM1-IPS02 are Analog Power Supply Units for
the Analog Input Unit.
• The CQM1-IPS01 connects to a single Analog Input Unit.
• The CQM1-IPS02 connects to a maximum of two Analog Input Units.
82
Section 1-2
System Configuration
1-2
System Configuration
The Analog Input Unit is mounted to the CQM1H/CQM1 CPU as shown in the
following illustration.
Power Supply Unit
Analog Power Supply Unit
I/O Unit
Analog Input Unit
I/O Unit
CPU
Sensors
• The Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply Unit are mounted to the
CPU, just like I/O Units.
• The Analog Input Unit can be mounted either on the left or right of the
Analog Power Supply Unit.
• Refer to 3-1 Settings for the wiring of the Analog Input Unit and Analog
Power Supply Unit.
Note Power must be supplied to the Analog Input Unit from the Analog Power Supply Unit and CQM1H/CQM1, otherwise the Analog Input Unit will not operate.
1-3
1-3-1
Connecting Devices
CPU
The Analog Input Units can be mounted to the following CPUs.
Name
CQM1H-series CPU
Model
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CQM1-series CPU
1-3-2
CQM1-CPU11-E
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
Analog Power Supply Units
Power can be supplied to the Analog Input Unit from the following Analog
Power Supply Units.
Model
CQM1-IPS01
Remarks
Connects to a single Analog Input Unit.
CQM1-IPS02
Connects to a maximum of two Analog input Units.
83
Section 1-4
System Construction
1-4
System Construction
The Analog Input Unit occupies many words and consumes a large current.
Therefore when constructing systems incorporating Analog Input Units, the
user should take the following into consideration.
1-4-1
Total Number of I/O Words
The maximum number of available I/O words for each system varies with the
CPU Unit. Refer to the following table.
Model
Maximum
number of I/O
words
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
16
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
32
CQM1-CPU11-E
CQM1-CPU12-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
8
16
The Analog Input Unit usually occupies four input words. On the other hand,
the Analog Power Supply Unit does not use any I/O words. The total number
of words for each system must not exceed the above maximum number of I/O
words.
If the Analog Input Unit has one or two analog inputs, turn OFF pin 9 of the
Analog Input Unit’s DIP switch so that the Analog Input Unit will occupy only
two words.
1-4-2
Total Current Consumption
The following is the capacity of each available Power Supply Unit, from which
power is supplied to a whole system.
Model
CQM1-PA203
CQM1-PA206,
CQM1-PA216
CQM1-PD026
Capacity
5 VDC, 3.6 A, 18 W
5 VDC, 6.0 A
24 VDC output, 0.5 A
Total: 30 W
5 VDC, 6 A, 30 W
The following table lists the current consumptions of the Analog Input Unit and
Analog Power Supply Units. Refer to the CQM1H Operation Manual (W363)
or the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226) and select the most suitable Power
Supply Unit for your CQM1H/CQM1.
Unit
Analog Input Unit
Analog Power Supply
Unit
Unit
Current consumption at 5 VDC
CQM1-AD041
CQM1-IPS01
80 mA
420 mA
CQM1-IPS02
950 mA
!Caution The total current consumption of each system must not exceed the capacity of
the Power Supply Unit to be used.
84
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Functions
This section provides the nomenclature and functions of the Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply Units.
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
2-1-1
Analog Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
2-1-2
Analog Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
2-2-1
89
Analog Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1
Nomenclature
2-1-1
Analog Input Unit
CQM1-AD041
Front View
Left View
Indicators
Input terminal 1
DIP switch
Input terminal 2
Input terminal 3
Input terminal 4
Protective
ground terminal
Terminal screws: M3
Power supply
cable
Indicators
Name
Color
Function
RDY
Green
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is turned on and the Analog
Input Unit is operating normally.
ERR
Red
Lit when pins 1 to 8 of the DIP switch on the left side of the
Analog Input Unit are all set to OFF (i.e., when the conversion of all inputs is prohibited).
BROKEN
WIRE
Red
Lit when an broken input wire is detected in an input range
of 4 to 20 mA at 1 to 5 V.
2CH/4CH
Orange
Lit when there are four words occupied. Not lit when there
are two words occupied.
Terminals
Terminal
86
Usage
Input terminal 1
Input terminal 2
Connect analog input for input 1.
Connect analog input for input 2.
Input terminal 3
Input terminal 4
Connect analog input for input 3.
Connect analog input for input 4.
Protective ground terminal
Connect the shielded wire of the analog input cable.
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
DIP Switch Function
The DIP switch is used to decide the operating method of the Analog Input
Unit.
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Factory setting
The following tables provides DIP switch settings for Analog Input Unit operation.
Input Range Settings
(Pins 1 to 8)
Input range settings can be made for all inputs.
Input setting
Input range
Input 1
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 1: OFF
Pin 2: ON
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: OFF
Input 2
Pin 3: ON
Pin 4: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: ON
Pin 3: ON
Pin 4: OFF
Input 2
Pin 5: ON
Pin 6: ON
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Pin 5: ON
Pin 6: OFF
Input 4
Pin 7: ON
Pin 8: ON
Pin 7: OFF
Pin 8: ON
Pin 7: ON
Pin 8: OFF
Pin 1: OFF
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Pin 7: OFF
Pin 8: OFF
–10 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA at 1 to 5 V
Conversion is prohibited
Word Settings (Pin 9)
The Analog Input Unit will occupy four words (64 points) when pin 9 is set to
ON. The Analog Input Unit will occupy two words (32 points) when pin 9 is set
to OFF.
Average Processing
Function (Pin 10)
Set pin 10 to ON to use the average processing function of the Analog Input
Unit. Set pin 10 to OFF if the average processing function is not used.
Caution
All pins must be set before mounting the Analog Input Unit to the CQM1H/
CQM1.
An error will result if pins 1 to 8 are all set to OFF (i.e., if all input conversion is
prohibited).
When pin 9 is set to OFF so that the Analog Input Unit will occupy two words,
be sure to set pins 5 to 8 to OFF.
Do not touch any internal components other than the DIP switch.
The time required for the Analog Input Unit to convert data will not be shortened even if some inputs are prohibited or if pin 9 is set to OFF so that the
Analog Input Unit will occupy two words.
87
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1-2
Analog Power Supply Unit
CQM1-IPS01
CQM1-IPS02
Indicators
Indicators
Connector 1
Connector for the power supply
cable of the Analog Input Unit
Connector 2
Connectors for the power supply
cable of the Analog Input Unit
Indicators
Name
Color
Function
P/S (incorporated by
Green
the CQM1-IPS01 only)
Lit when power is supplied to the Analog Input
Unit via the CQM1-IPS01.
P/S1 (incorporated by Green
the CQM1-IPS02 only)
P/S2 (incorporated by Green
the CQM1-IPS02 only)
Lit when power is supplied to the Analog Input
Unit via Connector 1 of the CQM1-IPS02.
Lit when power is supplied to the Analog Input
Unit via Connector 2 of the CQM1-IPS02.
Note The P/S, P/S1, and P/S2 indicators are not lit when the power supply cable is
disconnected.
Cable Connections
• Connect the power supply cable of the Analog Input Unit to the power
supply connector of the Analog Power Supply Unit and secure the power
supply cable connector with screws.
• The CQM1-IPS02 incorporates two power supply connectors. The power
supply cable of the Analog Input Unit can be connected to either one of
the power supply connectors.
!Caution Be sure to turn off the Analog Power Supply Unit before connecting or disconnecting the power supply cable of the Analog Input Unit. After connecting the
power supply cable, secure the power supply cable with the lock screws.
88
Section 2-2
Functions
2-2
2-2-1
Functions
Analog Input Unit
Input Range and
Conversion Data
The Analog Input Unit converts analog data into digital data according to the
range set as shown in the following graphs.
–10 to 10 V
If the Analog Input Unit is set to a range of –10 to 10 V with the DIP switch,
data between addresses F830 to 07D0 (hexadecimal) will be converted.
Addresses F830 to 07D0 (hexadecimal) are –2000 to 2000 in decimal.
If negative voltage is input to the Analog Input Unit, 2’s complement with the
MSB as the mark will be converted.
Conversion data
(2000) 07D0H*
Approx. –10.2
–10
(0000) 0000H*
10 Approx. 10.2
Input voltage (V)
(–2000) F030H*
* "H" indicates hexadecimal.
The conversion range is F800 to 07FF (–2048 to 2047 in decimal).
0 to 10 V
If the Analog Input Unit is set to a range of 0 to 10 V with the DIP switch, data
between addresses 0030 and 0FD0 (hexadecimal) will be converted.
Addresses 0030 to 0FD0 (hexadecimal) are 48 to 4048 in decimal.
Conversion data
(4048)0FD0H*
(2048)0800H*
(0048)0030H*
Approx. –0.1
0
* "H" indicates hexadecimal.
5
10 Approx. 10.1
Input voltage (V)
The conversion range is 0000 to 0FFF (0000 to 4095 in decimal).
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
If the Analog Input Unit is set to a range of 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, data
between addresses 0030 and 0FD0 in hexadecimal or 48 to 4048 in decimal
will be converted.
The conversion range of the Analog Input Unit is between addresses 0000
and 0FFF in hexadecimal or 0 to 4095 in decimal.
89
Section 2-2
Functions
If input data is below the converted range (i.e., the input voltage of the data is
less than approximately 0.95 V or the input current of the data is less than
approximately 3.8 mA), the broken wire detection function of the Analog Input
Unit will be activated.
Conversion data
(4095) 0FFFH*
(4048) 0FD0H*
(2048) 0800H*
(0048) 0030H*
(0000) 0000H*
0
1 V (4 mA)
Approx. 0.95 V
* "H" indicates hexadecimal.
3 V (12 mA)
5 V (20 mA)
Approx. 5.4 V
Input voltage (current)
!Caution The Analog Input Unit converts inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, etc., in this order. If the
input range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, the Analog Input Unit may be influenced
by the previous input if the input has changed greatly. Avoid setting a range of
–10 to 10 V as much as possible before using an input range of 1 to 5 V or 4
to 20 mA.
Mean Value Processing
Function
The mean value processing function of the Analog Input Unit is activated by
setting pin 10 of the Analog Input Unit’s DIP switch to ON. If the mean value
processing function is activated, all input values (inputs 1 to 4) will be averaged.
The mean value processing function enables the Analog Input Unit to convert
each input value eight times, average the values, and store the results as digital conversion data in the input word. The contents of the word are refreshed
with intervals of approximately 72 ms.
Note By using the AVG instruction of the CPU, only particular input values can be
averaged or the number of averaging operations can be changed.
Broken Wire Detecting Function
• The broken wire detecting function of the Analog Input Unit makes it possible to detect and alarm the disconnection of any wire that has been connected to the Analog Input Unit.
• The broken wire detecting function of the Analog Input Unit will work when
the input voltage and current drops to approximately 0.95 V and 3.8 mA or
lower if the Analog Input Unit is set to a range of 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA.
• When the Analog Input Unit detects wire disconnection, the broken wire
detecting indicator (BROKEN WIRE) will be lit and the broken wire flag of
the input that has been disconnected will be set to 1. (Refer to 3-3-2
Adjustment)
• The broken wire detecting indicator will reset to OFF automatically when
the input returns to normal.
90
SECTION 3
Operation
This section provides the operational procedures for the Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply Units.
3-1
3-2
3-3
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
3-1-1
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
3-1-2
Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
Bit Number Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
3-2-1
Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
3-2-2
Bit Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Programming and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
3-3-1
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
3-3-2
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
91
Section 3-1
Settings
3-1
3-1-1
Settings
Wiring
• Connect a two-conductor twisted-pair shielded cable to the Analog Input
Unit.
• The input terminals of the Analog Input Unit, to which the two-conductor
twisted-pair shielded cable is connected, vary with the input range as
shown in the following illustrations. In some environments, the shielded
wire of the two-conductor twisted-pair cable should be connected to the
COM terminal instead of the FG terminal of the Analog Input Unit so that
the Analog Input Unit will not be influenced by external noise.
• The COM terminal is internally connected to the analog 0-V terminal of
the Analog Input Unit.
Voltage Input
V+
V–
I+
COM
0V
FG
FG
Current Input
Short-circuit the V+ and I+ terminals for current input.
V+
V–
I+
COM
0V
FG
FG
3-1-2
Wiring Precautions
In order to prevent noise interference, note the following when wiring the Analog Input Unit:
• Do not install power lines or high-tension lines along in close proximity to
the Analog Input Unit’s input lines.
• When connecting an inductive load such as a relay, solenoid, or electromagnet valve to the Analog Input Unit, be sure to insert a surge absorption diode or surge absorber to the load circuit as shown in the following
examples. The surge absorption diode or surge absorber must be as
close as possible to the inductive load in the load circuit. The withstand
voltage of the surge absorption diode must be at least five times as large
as the circuit voltage.
92
Section 3-1
Settings
DC Relay
DC
RY
AC
RY
Surge absorption diode (Fuji Denki's ERB44-06 or equivalent)
AC Relay
Surge absorber (Okaya Denki's
CR-50500 or equivalent)
Solenoid
Solenoid
Surge absorber (Okaya Denki's
CR-50500 or equivalent)
If the Analog Input Unit malfunctions due to external noise through the power
line to the Analog Input Unit, insert a noise filter to the power line. The Analog
Input Unit may be influenced by noise if the Analog Input Unit and an electric
welding machine share a single power source or if the Analog Input Unit is
operated near a machine that generates high-frequency electromagnetic
waves.
Use a twisted-pair cable for the input wiring to the Analog Input Unit.
93
Section 3-2
Bit Number Allocation
Following is the input circuit for the Analog Input Unit.
1 MΩ
250 Ω
Internal circuit
10 kΩ
1 MΩ
250 Ω
10 kΩ
1 MΩ
250 Ω
10 kΩ
1 MΩ
250 Ω
10 kΩ
Analog ground
When the CQM1-IPS02 Analog Power Supply Unit is connected to the CQM1AD021 Analog Input Unit and CQM1-DA021 Analog Output Unit, each analog
ground is connected.
3-2
Bit Number Allocation
Two input words or four input words can be allocated to the Analog Input Unit,
which are specified with the DIP switch of the Analog Input Unit. Refer to
page 87, DIP Switch Function for details.
3-2-1
Word Allocation
Input words are allocated according to the mounting order (from left to right) of
the Units. Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual (W364), 3-2-3 I/O Allocation or the CQM1 Programming Manual (W228), 3-1 CQM1 Memory Area
Functions for details on I/O word allocation.
94
Section 3-2
Bit Number Allocation
No word is allocated to the Analog Power Supply Unit. Mount the Analog
Power Supply Unit next to the Analog Input Unit either to the left or right.
Word
000
IN 16 points
001
Out 16 points
IN 16 points
IN 16 points
Example: Four words are occupied.
Words 002 to 005 are used.
CQM1H/CQM1
I A
P
CPU
P D
S
S
006
100
Sensor
(Input 1)
Sensor
(Input 2)
Sensor
(Input 3)
(Input 4)
Sensor
3-2-2
PS
CPU
IN
OUT
IPS
AD
:
:
:
:
:
:
Power Supply Unit
CPU
Input Unit and terminals
Output Unit
Analog Power Supply Unit
Analog Input Unit
Bit Allocation
The following shows how the words allocated to the Analog Input Unit are
used. Any conversion data is stored in hexadecimal.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Word
n
n+1
Input 1 conversion data
Input 2 conversion data
n+2
n+3
Input 3 conversion data
Input 4 conversion data
Error Flag (Bit 13 of the First Word)
Bit 13 of the first word functions as an error flag. The error flag turns ON
(becomes 1) if an invalid setting is made with the DIP switch (e.g., prohibiting
the conversion of all words) and the Analog Input Unit does not operate. If the
input range of input 1 is –10 to 10 V and the conversion data of input 1 is negative, however, this bit turns ON because 2’s complement is used to indicate
the negative data. If bit 15 of the first word is OFF and bit 13 is ON, it indicates
an error.
Broken Wire Detection Flag (Bit 12 of Each Word)
If the input range of the Analog Input Unit is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA and the
voltage of an input is less than approximately 0.95 V or the current of an input
is less than approximately 3.8 mA, the broken wire detecting function of the
Analog Input Unit will be activated and the bit 12 of the corresponding word
will turn ON (the bit will become 1).
95
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
3-3
Programming and Adjustment
3-3-1
Programming
This section provides program examples for the Analog Input Unit using four
words in the following input ranges. The program examples are not valid for
the Analog Input Unit with its mean value processing function activated.
Input
Input range
Input 1
0 to 10 V
Word storing
conversion data
Wd 002
Input 2
Input 3
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
Wd 003
Wd 004
Input 4
–10 to 10 V
Wd 005
Refer to the SYSMAC CQM1H/CQM1 Programming Manual for details on the
instructions that are used.
Power ON
It takes approximately 10 ms for the Analog Input Unit to store the first conversion data after the Analog Input Unit is turned on if the mean value processing
function of the Analog Input Unit is not activated. It takes approximately 72 ms
for the Analog Input Unit to store the first conversion data after the Analog
Input Unit is turned on if the mean value processing function is activated. If the
user wants to operate the Analog Input Unit immediately after turning the Analog Input Unit on, construct the following program so that the Analog Input Unit
will wait until the conversion data becomes effective.
When the power is ON, Timer 5 starts operating. The Up Flag of Timer 5 turns
ON 100 ms later and the conversion data of input 1, which is stored in word
002, will be transferred to DM 0000.
25313 (Always ON)
TIM
n
#C0001
T005
MOV(21)
*
n
DM 0000
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
Scaling
The conversion of input voltage or current in a certain range to a value in a
certain range is called scaling. For example, if the user converts input voltage
or current so to be displayed as a percentage, the converted value will be displayed in the range 0 through 100.
Use the CPU instructions SCL and SCL2 for scaling.
Note The SCL2 instruction cannot be used on the CQM1-CPU11-E or CQM1CPU21-E.
An example for the conversion of negative data in an input range of –10 to
10 V into a positive value is provided.
96
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
SCL
The following is an example of SCL instruction use.
00000
SCL(66)
*
n
DM 0100
DM 0000
* " n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
Set value
DM 0100
DM 0101
DM 0102
DM 0103
0000
0030
0100
0FD0
(BCD)
(Hexadecimal)
(BCD)
(Hexadecimal)
When input 00000 turns ON, the conversion data of Word 002 is scaled
according to the parameters set in DM 0100 and DM 0102 and the result is
stored in DM 0000.
Scaling is executed so that 0030 to 0FD0 (hexadecimal) will correspond to
0000 to 0100 (BCD).
SCL2
The following is an example of SCL2 instruction use.
00000
SCL2( )
*
n
DM 0100
DM 0000
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
Set value
DM 0100
DM 0101
DM 0102
0030
0028
0001
(Hexadecimal)
(Hexadecimal)
(BCD)
When input 00000 turns ON, the conversion data of Word 002 is scaled
according to the parameters set in DM 0100 to DM 0102 and the result is
stored in DM 0000.
Scaling is executed by subtracting 30 (hexadecimal) from the conversion data
and multiplying the result by 1/40 (0001 (BCD)/0028 (hexadecimal)) so that
0030 to 0FD0 (hexadecimal) will correspond to 0 to 100 (BCD).
Program Example for Scaling Conversion Data in an Input Range of –10
to 10 V into a Positive Value
The SCL2 instruction processes negative values expressed by 2’s complement. On the other hand, the SCL instruction cannot process negative values.
The following is an example of the scaling of negative conversion data in an
input range of –10 to 10 V into a positive value so that the positive value can
be processed by the SCL instruction.
When input 00000 turns ON, the rightmost 12 bits of the conversion data in
Word 005 is obtained by the ANDW instruction and stored in DM 0200 as
seen in the following program.
97
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
The XORW instruction is used to reverse Bit 12 of the stored value so that the
range of the value will be shifted.
Scaling is executed so that F830 to 07D0 (hexadecimal) will correspond to
0030 to 0FD0 (hexadecimal).
Use the SCL and SCL2 instructions to convert the range further.
00000
ANDW(34)
#0FFF
n
DM 0200
XORW(36)
#0800
DM 0200
DM 0200
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
1. ANDW instruction
Hexadecimal (decimal)
FFFF (–0001)
to
F830 (–2000)
07D0 (2000)
to
0000 (0000)
Mean Value Processing
2. XORW instruction
Hexadecimal (decimal)
0FFF (–0001)
to
0830 (–2000)
07D0 (2000)
to
0000 (0000)
Hexadecimal (decimal)
0FD0
to
0800
07FF
to
0030
(4048)
(2048)
(2047)
(0048)
Mean value processing is used to convert unstable input or shut out noise
interference. Either the mean value processing function of the Analog Input
Unit or the AVG instruction can be used.
In this section, mean value processing using the AVG instruction is explained.
Refer to 2-2 Functions for details on the mean value processing function of
the Analog Input Unit.
The AVG instruction makes it possible to average conversion data the number
of times specified by the user per scan.
!Caution The AVG instruction cannot handle 2’s complement. If the conversion data is
2’s complement (i.e., the Analog Input Unit is set to a range of –10 to 10 V),
use the AVG instruction with the following program.
When input 00000 turns ON, any conversion data (F830 to 07D0) in a range
of –10 to 10 V is converted into a positive value (0030 to 0FD0) by the ANDW
and XORW instructions. Then the mean value of the converted data is
obtained by the AVG instruction. Ten data values in BCD are stored in DM
0300 to obtain the mean value of the converted data. The mean value is
stored in DM 0000.
While input 00000 is ON, the mean value of the latest 10 data values is
always stored in DM 0000.
When the AVG instruction is used, the number of words equal to the number
of data values to obtain the mean value plus two words must be secured next
98
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
to the word that stores the result. DM 0000 to DM 0011 are secured in the
example program.
ANDW(34)
#0FFF
Input condition
n
DM 0200
XORW(36)
#0800
DM 0200
DM 0200
AVG( )
DM 0200
#0300
DM 0000
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
3-3-2
Adjustment
The accuracy of the Analog Input Unit is ±1% without adjustment. If this is
adequate, the user need not adjust the Analog Input Unit. Fine tuning of the
Analog Input Unit is explained in this section.
The Analog Input Unit is adjusted with parameters set with the SCL instruction.
0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V,
or 4 to 20 mA
If the Analog Input Unit is set to a range of 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA,
follow the steps described below to adjust the Analog Input Unit.
1,2,3...
1. Refer to 3-1 Settings and connect the Analog Input Unit, CPU, and sensor
or transducer.
2. Connect a peripheral device such as a Programming Console to the CPU
(in any mode) and monitor the allocated word of the analog input to be adjusted.
PS
CPU
OUT
IPS
AD
AD
OUT
IN
Peripheral device
Sensing object
Sensor or transducer
3. Obtain the minimum value of the sensing object. For a sensing operation,
for example, set the sensing object so that the output value of the sensor
or transducer will be minimum. For temperature measurement, it may be
difficult to obtain the minimum value. In that case, instead of using the sensor or transducer, use a reference power supply to obtain the output at the
lowest temperature.
99
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
4. Use the peripheral device to monitor the word to which the analog input
data to be adjusted is stored. The CQM1H/CQM1 can be in any mode. The
analog input conversion data will be the lower-limit value.
5. Apply the same method to the analog input’s maximum value to obtain the
upper-limit value.
6. Create the following program to scale values in a range between the lower
and upper-limit values and designate the lower- and upper-limit values that
have been monitored as parameters. Refer to page 96, Scaling for details.
00000
SCL(66)
*
n
DM 0100
DM 0000
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
Set value
DM 0100
DM 0101
DM 0102
DM 0103
–10 to 10 V
0000
0100
(BCD)
(Hexadecimal)
Lower limit value
(BCD)
(Hexadecimal)
Upper limit value
If the Analog Input Unit is set to a range of –10 to 10 V, follow the steps
described below to adjust the Analog Input Unit.
1,2,3...
1. Refer to 3-1 Settings and connect the Analog Input Unit, CPU, and sensor
or transducer.
2. Connect a peripheral device such as a Programming Console to the CPU
and while referring to 3-3-1 Programming, create a program to convert 2’s
complement.
PS
CPU
OUT
IPS
AD
AD
OUT
IN
Peripheral device
Sensing object
Sensor or transducer
00000
ANDW(34)
#0FFF
Input condition
n
DM 0200
XORW(36)
#0800
DM 0200
DM 0200
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
100
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
3. Obtain the minimum value of the sensing object. For a sensing operation,
for example, set the sensing object so that the output value of the sensor
or transducer will be minimum. For temperature measurement, it may be
difficult to obtain the minimum value. In that case, instead of using the sensor or transducer, use a reference power supply to obtain the output at the
lowest temperature.
4. Put the CQM1H/CQM1 into operation mode or monitor mode and use the
peripheral device to monitor the word (DM0200) in which the scaled conversion data is stored. The conversion data will be the lower-limit value.
5. Apply the same method to the analog input maximum value to obtain the
upper-limit value.
6. Create the following program to scale values in a range between the lowerand upper-limit values and designate the lower and upper limit values that
has been monitored as parameters. Refer to page 96, Scaling for details.
00000
ANDW(34)
#0FFF
n
DM 0200
XORW(36)
#0800
DM 0200
DM 0200
SCL(66)
DM 0200
DM 0100
DM 0000
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog input.
Set value
DM 0100
DM 0101
DM 0102
DM 0103
0000
0100
Insert the conversion value corresponding to the minimum value.
Insert the monitor value "lower limit value."
Insert the conversion value corresponding to the maximum value.
Insert the monitor value "upper limit value."
101
Appendix A
Specifications
Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the Analog Input Unit and Analog Power Supply Units conform to those of the
CQM1H/CQM1 PC.
Performance Specifications
CQM1-AD041 Analog Input Unit
Item
Input signal range
Specification
Voltage input
–10 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
Current input
1 to 5 V
4 to 20 mA
External input impedance
Voltage input
Current input
1 MΩ max.
250 Ω
Resolution
Accuracy
1/4000
±0.5% (25°C)
±1.0% (0° to 55°C)
Conversion speed
Maximum input signal
2.5 ms/point (see note 1)
Voltage input
±15 V max.
Insulation method
Current input
±30 mA max.
Input terminals and PC signals are insulated with photocoupler (see note 2)
Current consumption
Weight
80 mA at 5 VDC excluding the current supplied from the Analog Power Supply Unit.
210 g
Dimensions
32 x 110 x 107 (W x H x D) mm
Note 1. Conversion data is refreshed every 10 ms (2.5 ms x 4).
2. Analog input terminals are not insulated from one another.
103
Appendix A
Specifications
Time Lag Required for Data Conversion
Analog input
Input signal of Analog
Input Unit
0V
Time
Analog input
This step-shaped change is
due to the time lag caused
by the Analog Input Unit's
internal filter circuit.
Output data of Analog
Input Unit
Time
2.5 ms x 4 words = 10 ms
CQM1-IPS01 Analog Power Supply Unit
No. of connectable Units
CQM1-AD041 x 1
Current consumption
Weight
420 mA at 5 VDC
145 g
Dimensions
32 x 110 x 107 (W x H x D) mm
CQM1-IPS02 Analog Power Supply Unit
104
No. of connectable Units
Current consumption
CQM1-AD041 x 2
950 mA at 5 VDC
Weight
Dimensions
180 g
32 x 110 x 107 (W x H x D) mm
Appendix A
Specifications
Dimensions
Analog Input Unit
2
110 115.7
47
130
107
284
32
Analog Power Supply Unit
2
107
110 115.7
122
32
Approx. 140
105
Specifications
106
Appendix A
Appendix B
Troubleshooting
Analog Input Unit
Kind of error
Indicator
Phenomenon
The RDY indicator is not lit.
Cause
1. The Unit is not connected
properly.
2. No end cover is attached.
The ERR indicator is lit.
The DIP switch is set to prohibit
the conversion of all inputs.
The BROKEN WIRE indicator is An input set to a range of 1 to 5
lit.
V or 4 to 20 mA is disconnected.
Remedy
Refer to the CQM1H/CQM1
Operation Manual and reset the
Analog Input Unit.
Refer to 2-1 Nomenclature and
set the DIP switch properly.
Check the wiring, terminal
board, input voltage, and input
current.
Unused analog input is set to a
range of 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA.
Set the unused analog input to
any other range or set to prohibit
conversion.
No. of words
The Analog Input Unit can be
allocated to two words only or
allocated to four words.
The DIP switch setting is incorrect.
The DIP switch setting can be
monitored with the 2 CH and 4
CH indicators. Check whether
the setting is proper. If not, set
the DIP switch properly.
Conversion data
The conversion data of the Analog Input Unit does not change
even if the input voltage or current is changed.
The power cable is not connected to the Analog Power
Supply Unit.
Connect the power cable.
The CPU has an I/O Unit over
error.
The total number words used by
the Units connected exceed the
maximum available words of the
CPU.
The voltage or current input is
not within the range that has
been set.
The conversion data of the Ana- The mean value processing
log Input Unit changes slowly
function is working.
when the input voltage or current
is changed.
I/O Unit over
Check the input voltage or current or the range that has been
set.
Set the mean value processing
switch properly.
Each Analog Input Unit uses
four or two words. Check if the
total number of words are
exceeding the maximum available words of the CPU.
Analog Power Supply Unit
Kind of error
LED
Phenomenon
Cause
The P/S (P/S1, P/S2) indicator is The power supply cable of the
not lit.
Analog Input Unit is not connected to the Analog Power
Supply Unit.
Remedy
Connect the power supply cable
to the Analog Power Supply
Unit. Turning on the Analog
Power Supply Unit will not cause
the P/S (P/S1, P/S2) indicator to
be lit if the power supply cable of
the Analog Input Unit is not connected to the Analog Power
Supply Unit.
Power is not supplied to the sys- Supply power to the system.
tem.
107
PART V
Analog Output Unit and Analog Power Supply Units
CQM1-DA021
CQM1-IPS01
CQM1-IPS02
109
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section provides the features and system configuration relating to the Analog Output Unit and Analog Power Supply
Units.
1-1
1-2
Features of Analog Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
1-2-1
Analog Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
1-2-2
CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
111
Section 1-1
Features of Analog Output Unit
1-1
Features of Analog Output Unit
• The CQM1-DA021 is a SYSMAC CQM1H/CQM1-series Analog Output
Unit that converts digital signals into analog signals.
• The Analog Output Unit has an output signal current range of 0 to 20 mA
and an output signal voltage range of –10 to 10V.
• A single Analog Output Unit allows two-point digital-to-analog conversion.
• It takes only 0.5 ms for two-point digital-to-analog conversion.
1-2
System Configuration
The Analog Output Unit is mounted to the CQM1H/CQM1 CPU as shown in
the following illustration.
Power Supply Unit
I/O Unit
I/O Unit
CPU
Controllers
• The CQM1-IPS01 Analog Power Supply Unit connects to a single Analog
Output Unit.
• A single Analog Input Unit and single Analog Output Unit can be connected to the CQM1-IPS02 Analog Power Supply Unit. Two Analog Output Units cannot be connected to the CQM1-IPS02 Analog Power Supply
Unit.
• The Analog Output Unit and Analog Power Supply Unit are mounted to
the CPU, just like I/O Units.
• The Analog Output Unit can be mounted either on the left or right of the
Analog Power Supply Unit. The Analog Output Unit must be, however,
adjacent to the Analog Power Supply Unit.
• Refer to 3-1 Settings for the wiring of the Analog Output Unit and Analog
Power Supply Unit.
112
Section 1-2
System Configuration
Note Power must be supplied to the Analog Output Unit from the Analog Power
Supply Unit and CQM1H/CQM1, otherwise the Analog Output Unit will not
operate.
1-2-1
Analog Power Supply Units
The following table lists the current consumptions of the Analog Output Unit
and Analog Power Supply Units. To select the Analog Power Supply Unit, refer
to the CQM1H Operation Manual (W363) or the CQM1 Operation Manual
(W226) for details.
Unit
1-2-2
Current consumption at 5 VDC (mA)
CQM1-DA021
CQM1-IPS01
90 mA
420 mA
CQM1-IPS02
950 mA
CPU
The Analog Output Unit occupies two I/O words. Make sure that the total I/O
points will not exceed the I/O points of the CPU. The Power Supply Unit does
not occupy any words.
113
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Functions
This section provides the nomenclature and functions of the Analog Output Unit.
2-1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
2-2
116
Functions of Setting Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
2-2-1
117
Output Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1
Nomenclature
Front View
Indicator
I1+
I1
Output terminal 1
V1+
V1
I2+
I2
Output terminal 2
V2+
V2
DA021
Terminal screws: M3
Power supply cable
(Connect to Analog Power Supply Unit)
Left Side View
Indicator
JT1 setting pin
JT2 setting pin
Power supply cable
Indicator
The green indicator of the Unit will
be lit if the Unit starts normally.
116
Section 2-2
Functions
Terminals
2-1-1
Terminal
Output terminal 1
Usage
Connect analog output for output 1.
Output terminal 2
Connect analog output for output 2.
Functions of Setting Pins
The setting pins are used to prohibit negative voltage output.
Setting pin
Status
Left
Right
1
JT1
JT2
2
Left
3
Right
1
Word n: Normal setting
(factory set)
Word n + 1: Normal setting
(factory set)
2
3
Word n: Negative voltage
output prohibited
Word n + 1: Negative voltage
output prohibited
When negative voltage output is prohibited, 0 V is output from the voltage output terminal if the Analog Output Unit has negative voltage output data.
Note
1. At the time of program debugging with an external device connected to the
Analog Output Unit, set the setting pins to prohibit negative voltage output
so that the wrong output will not damage the external device. Do not use
the Analog Output Unit to output negative voltage while the setting pins are
set to prohibit negative voltage output.
2. If an input circuit incorporating a pull-up resistor is connected to the Analog
Output Unit, set the setting pins to normal setting. If the setting pins are set
to prohibit negative voltage output, the Analog Output Unit will be influenced by the synch current and no output will be ON properly.
3. Do not touch any internal components other than the setting pins.
2-2
2-2-1
Functions
Output Characteristics
The Analog Output Unit converts data from the CPU into voltage or current
and outputs the data to the voltage terminal or current terminal.
Voltage Output
Data between 0000 and 07FF (hexadecimal) for output from the CPU are converted into a voltage of 0 to 10 V and output.
Negative voltage is converted to 2’s complement with the MSB. Data between
F800 to FFFF (hexadecimal) for output from the CPU is converted into a voltage of –10 to 0V and output. If negative voltage output is prohibited, 0 V will
be output.
Bits 11 to 14 of output data have nothing to do with output voltage. For example, 0 V is output for 0000 and 7800 (hexadecimal).
MSB
15
LSB
10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
These four bits have nothing to do with the output voltage.
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
117
Section 2-2
Functions
The following graph shows the voltage output characteristics of the Analog
Output Unit.
Output voltage (V)
10
5
F800
FC00
0
0000
0400
07FF
Output data (hexadecimal)
–5
–10
Note
1. If the setting pins are set to prohibit negative voltage output, no negative
voltage will be output.
2. In 2’s complement, –1 is FFFF, by subtracting 1 continuously, the smallest
value will be F800.
Current Output
Data between 0000 to 07FF (hexadecimal) for output from the CPU is converted into a current of 0 to 20 mA and output.
Bits 11 to 14 of the output data have nothing to do with output current (i.e., 0
mA is output for 0000 and 7800 (hexadecimal)). Bit 15 must be always set to
0. If bit 15 is set to 1, the data conversion of the Analog Output Unit may take
longer.
MSB
15
LSB
10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
These four bits have nothing to do with the output voltage.
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
The following graph shows the current output characteristics of the Analog
Output Unit.
Output current (mA)
20
10
0
0000
0400
07FF
Output data (hexadecimal)
118
SECTION 3
Operation
This section provides the operational procedures for the Analog Output Unit.
3-1
3-2
3-3
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
3-1-1
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
3-1-2
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
3-1-3
Terminal Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
Bit Number Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
3-2-1
Word Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
3-2-2
Bit Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
Programming and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
3-3-1
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
3-3-2
Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
119
Section 3-1
Settings
3-1
3-1-1
Settings
Cable Connections
• Connect the power supply cable of the Analog Output Unit to the power
supply connector of the Analog Power Supply Unit and secure the power
supply cable connector with screws.
• The CQM1-IPS02 incorporates two power supply connectors. The power
supply cable of the Analog Output Unit can be connected to either one of
the power supply connectors.
• Refer to the CQM1H Operation Manual (W363) or the CQM1 Operation
Manual (W226) for details on connecting an Analog Output Unit and Analog Power Supply Unit.
Note Do not pull the power supply cable, or the power supply cable may be broken
or connector may be disconnected.
3-1-2
Wiring
Voltage Output
Analog Output Unit Terminals
Current Output
Analog Output Unit Terminals
120
Section 3-1
Settings
• Connect a two-conductor twisted-pair shielded cable to the Analog Output
Unit.
• Do not install power lines or high-tension lines along in close proximity to
the Analog Output Unit’s output lines.
• The shielded wire must be grounded on the signal reception side.
• The negative side of each output lines are internally connected as shown
in the following diagram.
I1+
I1–
V1+
V1–
I2+
I2–
V2+
V2–
Analog GND
If the CQM1-IPS02 is connected to the Analog Output Unit and Analog Input
Unit, the analog GND terminal of the Analog Output Unit and that of the Analog Input Unit will be connected to each other.
121
Section 3-2
Bit Number Allocation
3-1-3
Terminal Arrangement
Indicators
Input terminal 1
Input terminal 2
Input terminal 3
Input terminal 4
Protective
ground terminal
Terminal screws: M3
Power supply
cable
3-2
3-2-1
Bit Number Allocation
Word Allocation
Output words are allocated according to the mounting order (from left to right)
of the Units. Consecutive two output words are allocated to the Analog Output
Unit.
Word 000
Word 001
Word 100
Word 101
Word 102
Word 103
Word 104
122
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
3-2-2
Bit Allocation
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Word
n
Output 1 Output data
n+1
Output 2 Output data
Note The shaded parts do not have any influence on the output voltage (current) of
the Analog Output Unit. All data is output in binary. Use a program to convert
the data from BCD.
3-3
3-3-1
Programming and Adjustment
Programming
Data is output to the words that have been allocated to the Output Unit. For
example, to output DM data, use the MOV (21) instruction as shown in the following ladder diagram.
MOV(21)
DM0000
Input condition
n
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog output 1.
Scaling
The conversion of a value in a certain range to an output voltage or current in
a certain range is called scaling.
An example for the conversion of data using the SCL3 and APR instructions is
provided below. The SCL3 instruction cannot be used with the CQM1-CPU11
or CQM1-CPU21.
By using the SCL3 and APR instructions, output data conversion from the
PC’s data and data output can be performed simultaneously.
SCL3 Instruction
The following is a program example for BCD output data stored in DM 0000.
CLC(41)
Input condition
SCL3
DM 0000
DM 0100
n
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog output 1.
123
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
If the following DM settings are made, the scaling as shown in the following
graph will be performed.
0100
(Hexadecimal) → (1)
(BCD)
→ (2)
Offset
Gain (graph gradient)
0200
(Hexadecimal) → (3)
(3)/(2)
0400
(Hexadecimal) → (4)
Upper limit
FC00
(Hexadecimal) → (5)
Lower limit
DM 0100
0030
DM 0101
DM 0102
DM 0103
DM 0104
Output data (Hexadecimal)
*1
(4) 0400
(+ 5 V)
100 (2)
0230
0200 (3)
(1) 0030
–9999 *2
0100
9999
Value of DM 0000
(Input data)
(BCD)
FC00 (5)
(–5 V)
*1: Output data is hexadecimal.
*2: By executing the STC (40) instruction instead of the CLC (41) instruction, turning the carry
(25504) ON, and executing the SLC3 instruction, the input value of the SLC3 instruction for
DM 0000 will be treated as a negative value.
APR Instruction
The following is a program example for BCD output data stored in DM 0000
APR
Input condition
DM0100
DM0000
n
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog output 1.
124
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
If the following DM settings are made, the scaling as shown in the following
graph will be performed.
In this example, BCD data between 0 to 1000 will be scaled in order to output
a current of 4 to 20 mA.
DM 0100
4000
Polygonal coordinate points and parameter data format
(Hexadecimal) → (Refer to the Analog Output Unit Operation Manual for details.)
DM 0101
03E8
(Hexadecimal) → (1) X axis maximum value
DM 0102
DM 0103
DM 0104
019A
03E8
07FF
(Hexadecimal) → (2) Y axis intersection
(Hexadecimal) →
(Hexadecimal) → Coordinate of (3)
Output data (hexadecimal)
(3)
07FF
(20 mA)
(2) 019A
(4 mA)
Value of DM 0000
(Input data)
(BCD)
0
1000 (1)
(03E8 hexadecimal)
It is possible to convert data into a polygonal line as shown below. Refer to the
linear approximation description for ARITHMETIC PROCESS – APR(––) in
Section 5 of the CQM1/CPM1 Programming Manual (W228) for details.
It is not possible to use the APR instruction to obtain negative output (2’s complement). If required, execute the APR instruction in a positive range and convert it to negative output using a program. The following is an example of a
program that converts data in a range of 0000 to 0FFF to data in a range of
8000 to 07FF.
CMP(20)
#0800
Input condition
APR result
25505 (> flag)
ORW(35)
#F800
APR result
n
25505 (> flag)
MOV(21)
APR result
n
* "n" indicates the allocated word for analog output 1.
125
Section 3-3
Programming and Adjustment
All data of the following graph is hexadecimal.
Output data to the Analog Output Unit
*1
0FFF
*2
0800
FFFF
F800
0000
07FF 0800
APR instruction exe
0FFF cution result data
*1: Data 0FFF is equivalent to 07FF as output data.
*2: Data 0800 is equivalent to 0000 as output data.
3-3-2
Precaution
For PC system settings, select the cycle OUT refresh method for output
refreshing (DM 6639) as much as possible. If the user needs to select direct
OUT refresh method, take the following into consideration.
Word n
Data output
Word n + 1
Data output
0.5 ms
Completion of output
After executing an instruction, it takes approximately 0.5 ms for output completion. If a new instruction or the END instruction is executed within 0.5 ms,
the completion of the output of the previous instruction may delay.
When turning PC on or off, the output terminal may have voltage momentarily
(i.e., approximately 1 V for a few milliseconds). If this causes a problem, take
an appropriate countermeasure externally.
126
Appendix A
Specifications
Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the Analog Output Unit conform to those of the CQM1H/CQM1 PC.
Performance Specifications
CQM1-DA021 Analog Output Unit
Item
Specification
No. of analog output points
Output signal range
2
Voltage output
–10 to 10 V
Current output
Voltage output
0 to 20 mA
1 kΩ min.
Current output
Voltage output
520 Ω max. (including wiring impedance)
0.5 Ω max.
Resolution
Voltage output
Current output
1/4096
1/2048
Accuracy
±0.5% (25°C)
±1.0% (0° to 55°C)
0.5 ms/2 points
External output permissible load
resistance
External output impedance
Conversion speed
Insulation method
Output terminals and PC signals are insulated with photocoupler (Output terminals
are not insulated from each other)
Dimensions
Internal current consumption
32 x 110 x 107 (W x H x D)
90 mA at 5 VDC
Weight
300 g max.
Dimensions
All dimensions are in millimeters.
2
110 115.7
32
130
107
47
284
127
Appendix B
Troubleshooting
Analog Output Unit
Kind of error
Indicator
Phenomenon
The RDY indicator is not lit.
Cause
Remedy
1. The Unit is not connected Refer to the CQM1H Operation
properly.
Manual (W363) or the CQM1
Operation Manual (W226) and
2. No end cover is attached.
reset the Analog Output Unit.
Output
The output voltage or current
does not change when output
data changes.
The output voltage or current
does not match the output characteristics.
The CPU has an I/O Unit over
error.
The power supply cable is not
connected to the Analog Power
Supply Unit.
An external device with an
impedance not within the permissible range is connected.
The total number of words used
by the Units connected exceeds
the maximum available words of
the CPU.
I/O Unit over
Connect the power supply cable.
Check if the impedance of the
external device is within the permissible range.
Each Analog Output Unit uses
two words. Check if the total
number of words is exceeding
the maximum available words of
the CPU.
129
PART VI
Sensor Unit
CQM1-SEN01 Sensor Unit
CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module
E39-M11 Dummy Module
131
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section provides the features and system configuration relating to the Sensor Unit and dedicated sensor modules.
1-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
1-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
1-3
Connecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
1-3-1
CPU Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
1-3-2
Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
1-3-3
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
1-3-4
Applicable Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
System Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
1-4
133
Section 1-1
Features
1-1
Features
• A maximum of four sensor modules in any combination and order can be
mounted to a single CQM1-SEN01.
• Sensor modules can be connected to the CQM1-SEN01 via connectors
and the CQM1-SEN01 can supply power to the modules, thus greatly saving wiring effort.
• The sensitivity of each sensor module is set by teaching. After power is
supplied to sensor modules mounted to the CQM1-SEN01 and teaching
is executed, the sensor modules will function properly. Teaching can be
executed remotely by using the dedicated CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
(sold separately).
• If the mode selector of each sensor module is set to SET, no signal is
transmitted to the PC. Signals are transmitted according to the sensor
operation only when the mode selector is set to RUN.
• At the time of system testing, no signals from Sensor Units will be
retrieved by the PC if the Programming Console connected to the PC is in
program mode.
1-2
System Configuration
The CQM1-SEN01 is a four-point input unit that occupies one input word. All
bits, other than input bits, will not be used as work bits.
It is recommended that the CQM1-SEN01 be mounted to the left of the
CQM1-OC@@@ Relay Contact Output Unit but not next to the CQM1OC@@@ Relay Contact Output Unit, otherwise the sensor modules mounted
to the CQM1-SEN01 will be influenced by noise that may be generated from
the CQM1-OC@@@ Relay Contact Output Unit at the time of load switching.
The following illustration shows a CQM1H/CQM1 system configuration that
includes the CQM1-SEN01.
CQM1-SEN01 Sensor Unit
CQM1H/CQM1
A variety of sensor modules
(four units max.)
CQM1-TU001
Remote Console
134
Section 1-3
Connecting Devices
1-3
1-3-1
Connecting Devices
CPU Models
The Sensor Unit can be mounted to the following CPUs.
Name
CQM1H-series CPU
CQM1-series CPU
1-3-2
Model
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CQM1-CPU11-E
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
Remote Console
Use the mode setting selector of the dedicated CQM1-TU001 Remote Console for the CQM1-SEN01 to set sensor modules mounted to the CQM1SEN01 to operation monitor mode or teaching mode.
1-3-3
Sensor Modules
The following dedicated sensor modules can be mounted to the CQM1SEN01.
Name
Model
Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
Photoelectric Module
E3X-MA11
E3C-MA11
Proximity Sensor Module
Dummy Module
E2C-MA11
E39-M11
Note Mount the E39-M11 Dummy Module to any unused slot of the CQM1-SEN01
for dust prevention.
1-3-4
Applicable Sensors
The following sensors can be used with the E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module.
Sensing method
Model
Thru-beam
Side view thru-beam
E32-T11L, E32-TC200, and E32-T11
E32-T14L
Heat-resistive thru-beam
Screen thru-beam
E32-T51
E32-T16
Reflective
Side view reflective
E32-D11L, E32-DC200, and E32-D11
E32-D14L
Heat-resistive reflective
Retroreflective
E32-D51
E32-R21
Note The E3X-MA11 can be used with a variety of sensors in addition to those
listed above. The E3X-MA11, however, cannot be used with the E32-DC9G,
E32-DC9G4, E32-D61, or E32-D73.
135
Section 1-4
System Construction
The following sensors can be used with the E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module.
Sensing method
Thru-beam
Model
E3C-S10, E3C-1, and E3C-2
Diffuse reflective
Convergent reflective
E3C-DS5W, E3C-DS10
E3C-LS3R
Mark detection reflective
E3C-VS1G, E3C-VS3R, E3C-VM35R,
and E3C-VS7R
The following sensors can be used with the E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor
Module.
1-4
• E2C-CR5B
• E2C-X1A
• E2C-CR8A
• E2C-C1A
• E2C-CR8B
• E2C-X1R5A
System Construction
The CQM1H/CQM1 treats the CQM1-SEN01 as a four-point Input Unit. Inputs
are allocated from word 000 including the built-in input bits of the CPU of the
CQM1H/CQM1.
The following is an example of word allocation. The CQM1-SEN01 occupies
one input word. Any bits without a sensor module cannot be used as work
bits. Any bits connected to a dummy module is always OFF.
Example
001
002
Slot no.
0
1
2
3
003
100
101
Out 16 points
SEN 4 points
000
Out 16 points
Word
IN 16 points
CPU
IN 16 points
P
S
IN 16 points
CQM1H/CQM1
PS
CPU
IN
OUT
SEN
:
:
:
:
:
Power Supply Unit
CPU
Input Unit and terminals
Output Unit
Sensor Unit
Bit
00300
00301
00302
00303
Note Refer to 3-2-3 I/O Allocation of the CQM1H Programming Manual or 3-2 Allocating I/O Bits of the CQM1 Programming Manual for details on I/O word allocation.
136
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Functions
This section provides the nomenclature and switch settings for the CQM1-SEN01, CQM1-TU001, E3X-MA11, E3CMA11, and E2C-MA11.
2-1
2-2
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
2-1-1
Sensor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
2-1-2
Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
2-1-3
Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
2-1-4
Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
2-1-5
Proximity Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
2-2-1
2-2-2
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module E3C-MA11
Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
137
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1
Nomenclature
2-1-1
Sensor Unit
CQM1-SEN01
Output indicators 0,
1, 2, and 3 (orange,
lit during operation)
Ready
indicator
(green)
Slot
0
Slot
1
Slot
2
Module
insertion
slots
Slot
3
Cover
Console
connector
Indicators
Name
Color
Green
RDY
0 to 3 (Output)
2-1-2
Function
Lit while the CQM1H/CQM1 is turned ON.
Orange Lit when the control outputs of sensor modules mounted to
the CQM1-SEN01 are ON.
Remote Console
CQM1-TU001
Stability operation
indicator (green)
Operation indicator
(orange)
Teaching indicator
(red/green)
Module selector
Mode setting selector
Teaching button
Buzzer (see note 1.)
Console
plug
3-m cable
Note
138
1. The buzzer beeps intermittently when the flashing function (refer to pages
155 and 157) of the E3X-MA11 or E3C-MA11 connected to the CQM1TU001 is working in teaching mode. The buzzer will stop beeping when the
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
teaching button is pressed. While teaching, the buzzer will beep once
when the teaching button is pressed. If teaching is not successful, the
buzzer will beep three more times.
2. Teaching operations on the CQM1-TU001 precede operations on sensor
modules.
Indicators
Features
Name
OPERATION
Color
Orange
Function
Lit when the control output of the sensor module
specified with the module selector is ON.
STABILITY
Green
Lit when the operation of the sensor module specified with the module selector is stable.
TEACHING
Red/Green
Indicates the teaching status of sensitivity setting.
• The module selected is set to the operation monitor mode or teaching
mode using the mode setting selector of the CQM1-TU001.
• When the CQM1-TU001 is in operation monitor mode, the operation of
the module selected with the module selector of the CQM1-TU001 can be
monitored with the operation indicator and stability operation indicator of
the CQM1-TU001.
• When the module selector is set to the 0, module 0 will be selected. Slide
the module selector and set to 1 for module 1, 2 for module 2, and 3 for
module 3.
• Set the mode setting selector to SET before setting the Sensor Unit to the
teaching mode and set the mode setting selector to RUN before setting
the Sensor Unit to the operation monitor mode.
Sensor Unit
Remote Console
The READY indicator (green) is lit when the I/O bus of the CQM1-SEN01 is
ready to retrieve signals after the CQM1-SEN01’s address is set properly with
the CPU. The output indicators (orange) are lit according to the operation of
each module inserted to slots 0 to 3 of the CQM1-SEN01.
• The stability operation indicator (green) and operation indicator (orange)
of the CQM1-TU001 correspond to the stability operation indicator (green)
and operation indicator (orange) of each sensor module.
• The teaching indicator (red/green) on the CQM1-TU001 is used as a
teaching monitor for the module selected.
• The operation indicator is lit when a sensing object is within the sensing
distance and the object will be detected. The stability operation indicator
shows the stability of detecting or non-detecting operations. The stability
operation indicator will be lit when a sensing object is located 0.93 times
as near as the sensing distance or less. The stability operation indicator
will be also lit when a sensing object is located 1.07 times as far as the
sensing distance or more.
139
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
Operation indicator (orange)
Stable nonsensing zone
Stability operation
indicator
OFF
ON
Setting distance x approx. 1.07
OFF
Setting distance
Setting distance x approx. 0.93
Stable sensing zone
2-1-3
ON
ON
Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
E3X-MA11
Front View
Stability operation indicator (green)
Operation
(orange)
Fiber insertion mouth (light emitting terminal)
(Refer to 3-4-1 E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber
Photoelectric Module for details.)
indicator
Mode selector (SET for teaching and RUN for normal operation.)
(Refer to 2-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Fiber insertion mouth (light reception terminal)
(Refer to 3-4-1 E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber
Photoelectric Module for details.)
Fiber lock lever
FREE: Fiber is released.
LOCK: Fiber is locked.
Teaching button
Indicators
Name
OPE
STAB
Color
Orange
Green
Function
Lit when the control output is ON.
Lit during stable light ON or dark ON, which can be
selected with the operation mode selector.
Note When the mode selector is set to SET, the operation indicator and stability
operation indicator are used to monitor teaching. Refer to 2-2 Switch Settings
for details.
Side View
Operation mode selector
L • on: Light ON
D • on: Dark ON
(Refer to 2-2 Switch
Settings for details.)
140
Timer selector
0 ms:
No timer
10 ms: OFF-delay timer
(Refer to 2-2 Switch
Settings for details.)
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1-4
Photoelectric Module
E3C-MA11
Front View
Stability operation indicator (green)
Operation indicator
(orange)
Mode selector (SET for teaching and RUN for normal operation.)
(Refer to 2-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Sensor code connection terminals
(Refer to 3-4-2 E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module for
details.)
Teaching button
Indicators
Name
OPE
STAB
Color
Orange
Green
Function
Lit when the control output is ON.
Lit during stable light ON or dark ON, which can be
selected with the operation mode selector.
Note When the mode selector is set to SET, the operation indicator and stability
operation indicator are used to monitor teaching. Refer to 2-2 Switch Settings
for details.
Side View
Operation mode selector
L • on: Light ON
D • on: Dark ON
(Refer to 2-2 Switch
Settings for details.)
2-1-5
Timer selector
0 ms:
No timer
10 ms: OFF-delay timer
(Refer to 2-2 Switch
Settings for details.)
Proximity Sensor Module
E2C-MA11
Front View
Stability operation indicator (green)
Operation indicator
(orange)
Mode selector (SET for teaching and RUN for normal operation)
(Refer to 2-2-2 E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module for
details.)
Teaching button
Sensor code connection terminals
(Refer to 3-4-3 E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module for
details.)
141
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
Indicators
Name
OPE
Color
Orange
Function
Lit when the control output is ON.
STAB
Green
The stability operation indicator shows the stability
of detecting or non-detecting operations. The stability operation indicator will be lit when a sensing
object is located 0.93 times as near as the sensing
distance or less. The stability operation indicator
will be also lit when a sensing object is located 1.07
times as far as the sensing distance or more.
Note When the mode selector is set to SET, the operation indicator and stability
operation indicator are used to monitor teaching. Refer to 4-1-1 E3X-MA11
Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module for details.
Side View
Timer selector
0 ms:
No timer
10 ms: OFF-delay timer
(Refer to 2-2-2 E2C-MA11
Proximity Sensor Module for
details.)
2-2
2-2-1
Cable length switches
(Refer to 2-2-2 E2C-MA11
Proximity Sensor Module for
details.)
Switch Settings
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module
Operation Mode Selector
Setting
Light• on
Dark• on
Function
The control output is ON when there is light incident.
The control output is ON when there is no light incident.
Timer Selector
Setting
0 ms
10 ms
142
Function
No timer
10-ms OFF delay timer active
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
Timing Charts
Timer selector set to OFF (0ms)
Timer selector set to ON (10 ms)
Operation mode selector set to L • on (Light
ON)
Operation mode selector set to L • on (Light
ON)
Light received
Light not received
Light received
Light not received
Operation indicator ON
(orange)
OFF
Operation indicator ON
(orange)
OFF
ON
OFF
Control output
ON
OFF
Control output
10 ms
Operation mode selector set to D • on (Dark
ON)
Operation mode selector set to D • on (Dark
ON)
Light received
Light not received
Light received
Light not received
Operation indicator ON
(orange)
OFF
Operation indicator ON
(orange)
OFF
ON
OFF
Control output
ON
OFF
Control output
10 ms
Note The operation mode selector and timer selector must be set before mounting
the E3X-MA11 to the Sensor Unit.
Mode Selector
Setting
2-2-2
Function
RUN
Normal operation
SET
Axis adjustment or sensitivity adjustment (teaching).
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module
Cable Length Switches
Set the switches as shown below to the length of sensor cable being used
either for standard cable lengths or after cutting the cable.
Sensor
E2C-CR8A
E2C-CR8B
E2C-X1A
E2C-C1A
E2C-X1R5A
Cable length
Position of the
switches of the
Amplifier Unit
0 to 1 m
1 to 2 m
2 to 3 m
3 to 4 m
4 to 5 m
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
Knob
position
Note
1. If two cables of the same length and diameter are being attached together
in parallel, position one of the cables 1 m above or below the other.
2. Set all switches to the right for the E2C-CR5B.
Timer Switch
Setting
0 ms
10 ms
Function
No timer
10-ms Off-delay timer active
143
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
The following is an example of a sensor output operation chart.
Sensing distance
Approx. 107%
Setting distance → 100%
Approx. 93%
10 ms
Control output (OFFdelay activated)
h
ON
OFF
Control output
ON
(OFF-delay deactivated) OFF
Operation indicator
(orange)
ON
OFF
Stability operation
indicator (green)
ON
OFF
Note Set the switches on the side panel before mounting the Module to the Sensor
Unit.
Mode Selector
Setting
RUN
SET
Note
Function
Normal operation
Sensitivity adjustment (teaching)
1. Refer to 3-4-1 E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module for the fiber
lock lever of the E3X-MA11.
2. Refer to SECTION 4 Sensor Module Operation for details on the operation
of the mode selector and teaching button.
144
SECTION 3
Connections
This section describes the connections between the CQM1-SEN01 and E3X-MA11, E3C-MA11, E2C-MA11, and CQM1TU001.
3-1
Wiring Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
3-1-1
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
3-1-2
Connecting Sensors to the E3C-MA11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
3-1-3
Connecting Sensors to the E2C-MA11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
3-2
Mounting and Dismounting the Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
3-3
Connection of CQM1-TU001 Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
3-4
Connection of a Variety of Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
3-4-1
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
3-4-2
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
3-4-3
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
145
Section 3-1
Wiring Precaution
3-1
3-1-1
Wiring Precaution
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
Fiber Head
The tightening torque applied to the fiber head of each Fiber Unit should be as
follows:
Screw-mounting Model
Column Model
Retaining screw (M 3 max.)
Spring mounting clip
Toothed washers
Nuts
(attachment)
Fiber Unit
M3/M4 screw
Tightening torque
0.78 N • m max.
M6 screw
3-mm-dia. column
0.98 N • m max.
0.29 N • m max.
E32-D14L
E32-T16
0.98 N • m max.
0.49 N • m max.
E32-R21
0.59 N • m max.
Use a proper sized wrench.
3-1-2
Connecting Sensors to the E3C-MA11
Strip the vinyl insulation off all the connection cords 12 mm from the ends for
the receiver and projector terminals and expose each conductor 6 mm from
the end of the conductor. Due to the small terminals, be careful not to short
the wires when wiring.
The length of the cable connected to the terminals of the E3C-MA11 must be
10 m maximum without any extension terminals.
6 mm max.
12 mm max.
146
Section 3-1
Wiring Precaution
3-1-3
Connecting Sensors to the E2C-MA11
Do not use excessive force when securing the nut for E2C-X-series sensors.
Always use a toothed washer.
Model
Tightening torque
E2C-X1A
E2C-X1R5A
0.98 N • m
2.0 N • m
Note The above tightening torques assume that a toothed washer is being used.
Cylindrical Sensors
without Screws
Use the following tightening torque when attaching a sensor with a set screw:
0.2 N • m max.
Set screw
(M3) hole
7 to
11.5 mm
Dedicated
Y92E-F3R5
Mounting Bracket for 3.5 dia.
screws (sold separately)
The Y92E-F5R4 for 5.4 dia.
screws is sold separately.
Effects of Surrounding
Metal
When mounting the sensor within a metal panel, ensure that the clearances
given in the following table are maintained.
l
dia. : d
m
Model
D
Dimension (mm)
d
D
I
m
E2C-CR5B
E2C-CR8@
2
0
6
(3.5)
2
0
1.5
2.4
E2C-X1A
E2C-C1A
0
0
(5)
(5.4)
0
0
3
3
E2C-X1R5A
0
(8)
0
4.5
Note Diameters (d) in parentheses are the external diameters for shielded sensors.
Although the E2C-CR5B is a shielded sensor, it cannot be mounted within a
metal panel.
147
Section 3-2
Mounting and Dismounting the Sensor Module
Mutual Interference
When installing two or more sensors face to face or side by side, ensure that
the minimum distances given in the following table are maintained. Sensors
can be mounted together in parallel, however, if their cable length switches
are set to different values.
B
A
Model
Distance (mm)
A
3-2
B
E2C-CR5B
20
15
E2C-CR8@
E2C-X1A
20
20
15
15
E2C-C1A
E2C-X1R5A
20
20
15
15
Mounting and Dismounting the Sensor Module
Mounting
Mount the E3C-MA11 securely to the Sensor Unit so that the fiber sensor connector side is on the left and the indicator side is on the right.
Dismounting
A pulling tool is provided with the Sensor Unit. To dismount the E3C-MA11
from the Sensor Unit, hook the pulling tool onto the square hole on the right
side of the E3C-MA11 and pull out the E3C-MA11 carefully.
Pulling tool
Note Be sure to turn off the CQM1-SEN001 before mounting or dismounting sensor
modules.
148
Section 3-3
Connection of CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
3-3
Connection of CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
• Remove the cover of the Unit and insert the console plug into the console
connector of the Unit so that the polarity of the console plug and the console connector will match.
• The console connector does not incorporate a lock mechanism. To disconnect the console plug, hold the console plug and pull it straight out.
• It is not possible to mount the cover to the Unit if the console plug is connected to the console connector.
• The console plug can be disconnected from the console connector even if
the Unit is turned on. Do not, however, disconnect the console plug while
the sensitivity of the Unit is being adjusted.
3-4
3-4-1
Connection of a Variety of Sensors
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
Connecting Fibers
Set the fiber lock lever of the E3X-MA11 to FREE before inserting an optical
fiber cable to a fiber insertion mouth of the E3X-MA11 as shown in the following illustration.
After inserting two optical fiber cables from the Fiber Units to the fiber insertion mouths of the E3X-MA11, set the fiber lock lever to LOCK to secure the
optical fiber cables.
Insertion mark
Insert the optical fiber cables into the E3X-MA11 before mounting the E3XMA11 to the Sensor Unit.
Note If the tips of the two optical fiber cables are not inserted into the E3X-MA11 to
the insertion marks, the sensing distance may be reduced.
Disconnecting Fibers
To disconnect the optical fiber cables from the E3X-MA11, hold and pull out
the optical fiber cables carefully. Before disconnecting the optical fiber cables
from the E3X-MA11, be sure to set the fiber lock lever to FREE.
149
Section 3-4
Connection of a Variety of Sensors
Note If the optical fiber cables are disconnected without setting the fiber lock lever
to FREE, the optical fiber cables may break and the E3X-MA11 may malfunction due to fragments of broken optical fiber cables.
Cutting Fiber
• Insert a 2.2-mm-dia. fiber into an E39-F4 Fiber Cutter and determine the
length of the fiber to be cut.
• Press down the Fiber Cutter in a single stroke to cut the fiber.
• When the fiber is cut, insertion marks are inscribed on the fiber. The portion from the tip up to the insertion marks should be inserted into the E3XMA11.
12.6
Insertion mark
2.2 dia.
• To correctly inscribe the insertion mark, place the length of the fiber into
the Fiber Cutter in direction 1 as illustrated below, and press down firmly
in direction 2.
2
1
• The cutting holes cannot be used twice. If the same hole is used twice,
the cutting face of the fiber will be rough and the sensing distance will be
reduced. Always use an unused hole.
Use either one of the two rightmost holes to cut a thin fiber as follows:
1,2,3...
1. An attachment is temporarily fitted to each thin fiber before shipment.
Temporarily fitted
2. Secure the attachment after adjusting the position of it in the direction indicated by the arrow.
3. Insert the fiber into the E39-F4 and cut.
Cutter E39-F4
Two holes for
thin fiber
Three holes for
standard fiber
(2.2 mm dia.)
150
Section 3-4
Connection of a Variety of Sensors
Note Insert the fiber in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Connection
• Do not pull or press the Fiber Unit with excessive force. The thin-type optical fiber cable withstands a force of 9.8N maximum and the standard-type
optical fiber cable withstands a force of 29.4N maximum. Handle the optical fiber cables with care because they are thin.
• Do not bend the Fiber Unit with a radius smaller than the permissible
radius. Make all bends in the optical fiber cable at least 20 mm from all
connected units.
Correct
Amplifier
Incorrect
Fiber unit
20 mm
max.
20 mm max.
• Do not apply excess force on Fiber Units.
Fiber unit
Nylon wire holder
Correct
Metal holder
Incorrect
• The Fiber Head could be broken by excessive vibration. To prevent this,
the following is effective:
A one-turn loop can
absorb vibrations.
Tape
151
Section 3-4
Connection of a Variety of Sensors
3-4-2
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module
Connection
3
Thru-beam model
3
Reflective model
1
1
Red
Shield
2
Red
Shield
4
2
4
Shield
White
White
Note
Shield
1. Strip the vinyl insulation off all the connection cords 12 mm from the ends
for the receiver and projector terminals and expose each conductor 6 mm
from the end of the conductor. Due to the small terminals, be careful not to
short the wires when wiring.
2. The length of the cable connected to the terminals of the E3C-MA11 must
be 10 m maximum without any extension terminals.
3-4-3
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module
Connection
Proximity sensor
3
Shield
4
E2C-MA11 Proximity Module
152
SECTION 4
Sensor Module Operation
This section provides information on the operation of the CQM1-SEN01.
4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
4-1-1
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
4-1-2
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
4-1-3
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
153
Section 4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
When the CQM1-TU001 is connected to the CQM1-SEN01, operations on the
CQM1-TU001 precede operations on sensor modules. Operations without
connecting the CQM1-TU001 is explained hereunder.
4-1-1
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
Sensitivity Adjustment
There are three sensitivity adjustment methods. Choose the most optimum
method according to the application.
Maximum Sensitivity
Setting
Use the following procedure to set for maximum sensitivity
1,2,3...
1. Set the mode selector to SET. When using a thru-beam fiber sensor, adjust
the optical axis using the flashing function of the thru-beam fiber sensor.
2. Press the teaching button for 3 s minimum. The teaching indicator will turn
from orange to green in 3 s.
3. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the maximum sensitivity setting
of the E3X-MA11.
Note The maximum sensitivity of the Sensor Unit can be automatically set regardless of the set distance or light reception.
Teaching without a
Sensing Object (Only for
Diffusive Reflective
Sensor)
1,2,3...
If any background object exerts an influence when setting the maximum sensitivity on the E3X-MA11, try the following method.
1. Locate the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Set the mode selector to SET.
3. Press the teaching button. The teaching indicator (orange) will be lit.
4. Set the mode selector to RUN. If teaching is successful, the stability operation indicator (green) will be lit. If teaching is unsuccessful, the stability
operation indicator will flash. In this case make sure that the optical fiber
cable of the sensor is connected securely, and then change the sensing
distance that has been set and repeat from step 2.
Note The sensitivity of the E3X-MA11 is set to maximum if teaching is performed
with very little light or if the sensor head is not located within the sensing distance. If stable detection of objects is not possible after teaching, try teaching
with a sensing object as described in the following.
Teaching with a Sensing
Object
1,2,3...
Teaching with a sensing object is recommended if delicate sensing operation
is required.
1. Locate the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Set the mode selector to SET. When using a thru-beam fiber sensor, adjust
the optical axis using the flashing function of the thru-beam fiber sensor.
3. Locate the object at the sensing position and press the teaching button.
Mark
Light is not
received.
Base
The teaching indicator will turn orange.
154
Section 4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
4. Move the object and press the teaching button. If teaching is successful,
the teaching indicator will turn from orange to green. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator (orange) will flash, in which case change the
position of the object and the sensing distance that have been set and repeat from step 3.
Mark
Light is received.
Base
5. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E3X-MA11.
Light Axis Adjustment
with Flashing Function
• This function enables the user to easily adjust the light axis of a thrubeam fiber with the light source flashing.
• If the light projection fiber head axis and the light reception fiber head axis
do not agree with each other, and the amount of light received becomes
90% of the peak value or less, the flashing function of the E3X-MA11 will
operate. The E3X-MA11 retains the peak value when the mode selector is
set to SET so that the axes of the fiber heads can be easily adjusted to
agree with each other. When the axes agree, the tip of the fiber for light
emission will be lit.
• If a Remote Console is connected to the Sensor Unit, the buzzer of the
Remote Console will beep intermittently when the flashing function starts
operating. The buzzer will stop beeping when the axes agree and the tip
of the fiber for light emission is lit.
• Teaching is possible by pressing the teaching button while the flashing
function is operating.
θ
Fiber for light emission
Fiber for light
reception
Optical
input
The peak of
light reception
90% of the
peak value
Lit in
this
range.
Angle of
the head
(θ)
Flashing
Lit
Flashing
155
Section 4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
4-1-2
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module
Sensitivity Adjustment
There are three sensitivity adjustment methods. Choose the most optimum
method according to the application.
Maximum Sensitivity
Setting
1,2,3...
1. Set the mode selector to SET. When using a thru-beam fiber sensor, adjust
the optical axis using the flashing function of the thru-beam fiber sensor.
2. Press the teaching button for 3 s minimum. The teaching indicator will turn
from orange to green in 3 s.
3. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the maximum sensitivity setting
of the E3C-MA11.
Note The maximum sensitivity of the Sensor Unit can be automatically set regardless of the set distance or light reception.
Teaching without a
Sensing Object (Only for
Diffusive Reflective
Sensor)
1,2,3...
If any background object exerts an influence when setting the maximum sensitivity on the ECX-MA11, try the following method.
1. Locate the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Set the mode selector to SET.
3. Press the teaching button. The teaching indicator (orange) will be lit.
4. Set the mode selector to RUN. If teaching is successful, the stability operation indicator (green) will be lit. If teaching is unsuccessful, the stability
operation indicator will flash. In this case make sure that the sensor cable
is connected securely, and then change the sensing distance that has
been set and repeat from step 2.
Note The sensitivity of the E3C-MA11 is set to maximum if teaching is performed
with very little light or if the sensor head is not located within the sensing distance. If stable detection of objects is not possible after teaching, try teaching
with a sensing object as described in the following.
Teaching with a Sensing
Object
1,2,3...
Teaching with a sensing object is recommended if delicate sensing operation
is required.
1. Locate the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Set the mode selector to SET. When using a thru-beam fiber sensor, adjust
the optical axis using the flashing function of the thru-beam fiber sensor.
Sensing object
Mark detection
No
sensing
object
Background object
3. Locate the object at the sensing position and press the teaching button.
Mark detected
The teaching indicator will turn orange.
4. Move the object and press the teaching button. If teaching is successful,
the teaching indicator will turn from orange to green. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator (orange) will flash, in which case change the
156
Section 4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
With
sensing
object
Background object
position of the object and the sensing distance that have been set and repeat from step 3.
Mark not detected
5. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E3X-MA11.
Light Axis Adjustment
with Flashing Function
If the light projection fiber head axis and the light reception fiber head axis do
not agree with each other, and the amount of light received becomes 90% of
the peak value or less, the flashing function of the E3C-MA11 will operate.
The E3C-MA11 retains the peak value when the mode selector is set to SET
so that the axes of the fiber heads can be easily adjusted to agree with each
other. When the axes agree, the indicator on the light projection fiber head will
be lit. The E3C-DS10T does not incorporate an indicator on the light projection fiber head.
The indicator on the light projection fiber head will work as an operation indicator when the E3C-MA11 is in RUN mode.
Indicator
Sensor head for
light emission
Sensor head for
light reception
Optical
input
The peak of
light reception
90% of the
peak value
Lit in
this
range.
Angle of
the head
(θ)
Flashing
4-1-3
Lit
Flashing
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module
Be sure to perform teaching before using the E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor
Module.
Sensitivity Adjustment
There are three sensitivity adjustment methods. Choose the most ideal
method according to the application.
Teaching without a
Sensing Object
Teaching without a sensing object is recommended when using the E2CMA11 as a standard proximity sensor.
1,2,3...
1. Locate the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Set the mode selector to SET.
157
Section 4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
3. Press the teaching button. The teaching indicator (orange) will be lit.
4. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E2C-MA11.
l
ON point
The ON point will be automatically set at the maximum value of the stable
sensing distance. If teaching is unsuccessful, the stability operation indicator will flash. In this case make sure that the optical fiber cable of the sensor is connected securely and that there is no sensing object, and then
repeat from step 3.
Teaching with a Sensing
Object
1,2,3...
Teaching with a sensing object is recommended for sensing level differences
or double-sheet detection.
1. Place the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Set the mode selector to SET.
3. Place the object at the sensing position at which the desired output will be
OFF and press the teaching button.
l1
Desired output at l 1 : OFF
The teaching indicator will turn orange.
4. Move the object to the position where you want to turn ON the output and
press the teaching button. If teaching is successful, the teaching indicator
will turn from orange to green.
l2
Desired output at l 2 : ON
5. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E3X-MA11. The ON point will be set midway between the points set in
steps 3. and 4. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator (orange)
will flash, in which case check that the sensor cable is connected, change
the position of the object and the sensing distance that have been set, and
repeat from step 3.
ON point
l2
l1
158
Section 4-1
Operation without CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
Note The sensor may not properly reset after detection when teaching detection of
subtle changes. Always check to be sure the sensor is resetting even if the
indicator shows that teaching is OK.
Teaching for Position
Control
Teaching for position control is recommended when specifying the ON point
for the detection of objects which are too close.
1,2,3...
1. Place the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Set the mode selector to SET.
3. Press the teaching button. The teaching indicator (orange) will be lit.
4. Move the object to the position where you want the output ON and press
the teaching button. If teaching is successful, the teaching indicator will
turn from orange to green.
l
5. Do not move the sensing object and press the teaching button a third time.
If teaching is successful, the teaching indicator will turn from green to orange.
l
6. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E3X-MA11. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator (orange) will
flash, in which case make sure that the sensor cable is connected, change
the position of the object and the sensing distance that have been set, and
repeat from step 3.
l
ON point
Note Teach within the stable sensing range. Although indicators may indicate that
teaching is OK even outside of this range, the sensor may not reset properly
after detection. Always check to be sure the sensor is resetting after teaching.
159
SECTION 5
Remote Console Operation
This section provides information on the operation of the CQM1-TU001 Remote Console.
5-1
5-2
Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
5-2-1
5-2-2
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
161
Section 5-1
Mode Setting
5-1
Mode Setting
RUN Mode
The CQM1-TU001 operates normally with sensors connected in this mode. A
sensor module can be selected with the module selector of the CQM1-TU001
in run mode and the operation of the sensor module can be monitored with
the operation indicator and stability operation indicator of the CQM1-TU001.
SET Mode
Sensors can be set or their sensitivities can be adjusted in this mode.
Note Before using the CQM1-TU001, set the mode selector of each sensor module
to RUN.
5-2
5-2-1
Sensitivity Adjustment
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module
Note
1. Be sure to perform teaching before use.
2. When the CQM1-TU001 is connected to a sensor unit, operations on the
CQM1-TU001 precede operations on sensor modules.
Maximum Sensitivity Setting
1,2,3...
1. Connect the CQM1-TU001 to the CQM1-SEN01.
2. Set the module selector to the number of the sensor module on which
teaching will be performed, and the set the mode selector of the sensor
module to RUN.
3. Set the mode setting selector of the CQM1-TU001 to SET.
4. Press the CQM1-TU001 teaching button for approximately 3 s (minimum)
until the teaching indicator changes to red from green.
5. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the maximum sensitivity setting
of the E3X-MA11.
Note The maximum sensitivity of the Sensor Unit can be automatically set regardless of the set distance or light reception.
Teaching without a Sensing Object
(Only for Diffusive Reflective Sensor)
1,2,3...
1. Place the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Connect the CQM1-TU001 to the CQM1-SEN01.
3. Set the module selector to the number of the sensor module on which
teaching will be performed, and the set the mode selector of the sensor
module to RUN.
4. Set the mode setting selector of the CQM1-TU001 to SET.
5. Press the teaching button. The teaching indicator (red) will be lit.
6. Set the mode selector to RUN. If teaching is successful, the stability operation indicator (green) will be lit. If teaching is unsuccessful, the stability
operation indicator will flash. In this case make sure that the optical fiber
cable of the sensor is connected securely, and then change the sensing
distance that has been set and repeat from step 4.
Note The sensitivity of the E3X-MA11 is set to maximum if teaching is performed
with very little light or if the sensor head is not located within the sensing distance. If stable detection of objects is not possible after teaching, try teaching
with a sensing object as described in the following.
162
Section 5-2
Sensitivity Adjustment
Teaching with a Sensing Object
1,2,3...
1. Place the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Connect the CQM1-TU001 to the CQM1-SEN01.
3. Set the module selector to the number of the sensor module on which
teaching will be performed, and the set the mode selector of the sensor
module to RUN.
4. Set the mode setting selector of the CQM1-TU001 to SET.
5. Place the object at the sensing position and press the teaching button. The
teaching indicator will turn red.
6. Move the object and press the teaching button. If teaching is successful,
the teaching indicator will turn from red to green. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator (red) will flash, in which case change the position
of the object and the sensing distance that have been set and repeat from
step 5.
7. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E3X-MA11.
5-2-2
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module
Note
1. Be sure to perform teaching before use.
2. When the CQM1-TU001 is connected to a sensor unit, operations on the
CQM1-TU001 precede operations on sensor modules.
Teaching without a Sensing Object
1,2,3...
1. Place the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Connect the CQM1-TU001 to the CQM1-SEN01.
3. Set the module selector to the number of the sensor module on which
teaching will be performed.
4. Set the mode setting selector of the CQM1-TU001 to SET.
5. Press the teaching button. The teaching indicator (red) will be lit.
6. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E2C-MA11. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator will flash. In
this case make sure that the optical fiber cable of the sensor is connected
securely and that there is no sensing object, and then repeat from step 5.
Teaching with a Sensing Object
1,2,3...
1. Place the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Connect the CQM1-TU001 to the CQM1-SEN01.
3. Set the module selector to the number of the sensor module on which
teaching will be performed.
4. Set the mode setting selector of the CQM1-TU001 to SET.
5. Place the object at the sensing position at which the desired output will be
OFF and press the teaching button. The teaching indicator will turn red.
6. Move the object to the position where you want to turn ON the output and
press the teaching button. If teaching is successful, the teaching indicator
will turn from red to green.
7. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E3X-MA11. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator (red) will
flash, in which case make sure that the sensor cable is connected, change
the position of the object and the sensing distance that have been set, and
repeat from step 5.
163
Section 5-2
Sensitivity Adjustment
Teaching for Position Control
1,2,3...
1. Place the sensor head in the sensing range of the sensor.
2. Connect the CQM1-TU001 to the CQM1-SEN01.
3. Set the module selector to the number of the sensor module on which
teaching will be performed.
4. Set the mode setting selector of the CQM1-TU001 to SET.
5. Press the teaching button. The teaching indicator (red) will be lit.
6. Move the object to the position where you want to turn ON the output and
press the teaching button. If teaching is successful, the teaching indicator
will turn from red to green.
7. Do not move the sensing object and press the teaching button a third time.
If teaching is successful, the teaching indicator will turn from green to orange.
8. Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting on the
E3X-MA11. If teaching is unsuccessful, the teaching indicator (red) will
flash, in which case make sure that the sensor cable is connected, change
the position of the object and the sensing distance that have been set, and
repeat from step 5.
164
Appendix A
Specifications
CQM1-SEN01 Sensor Unit
Item
Specification
Input points
4 max.
Current consumption
Input response time
600 mA max. at 5 VDC (supplied from Power Supply Unit).
8 ms max.
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
20 MΩ min. at 500 VDC between FG terminal and all signal terminals.
1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between FG terminal and all signal terminals.
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
1,500 V (peak to peak) with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 µs and a 1-ns rising edge.
10 to 150 Hz, 0.15-mm double amplitude for 80 min. each in X, Y, and Z directions.
Shock resistance
Ambient temperature
100 m/s2 three times each in X, Y, and Z directions.
Operating: 0° to 55°C
Storage:
–20° to 75°C
Operating ambient humidity
Grounding
10% to 90% with no condensation
Ground Sensor Unit at a resistance of less than 100 Ω
Enclosure rating
Dimension (mm)
Enclosed mounting
32 × 110 × 120 (W × H × D)
Weight
Display
160 g (Module excluded)
READY (green); output (orange)
CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
Item
Specification
Cable length
Power supply voltage
3m
5 VDC (supplied from Sensor Unit)
Current consumption
Ambient temperature
60 mA max.
Operating: 0° to 55°C
Storage:
–20° to 75°C
Operating ambient humidity
Enclosure rating
10% to 90% with no condensation
Enclosed mounting
Dimension (mm)
Weight
52.9 × 145 × 16.5 (W × H × D)
165 g including 3-m cable
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
Item
Light source (wavelength)
Red LED (660 nm)
Rating
Power supply voltage
Current consumption
9 VDC (supplied from Sensor Unit)
50 mA max.
Response time
Timer function
500 µs max.
10-ms OFF-delay timer (see note)
Indicators
Teaching monitor
Operation indicator (orange) and stability operation indicator (green)
Indicators (operation indicator and stability operation indicator)
Output mode
Dimension (mm)
Light ON and Dark ON (selectable)
28.1 × 17.8 × 62.1 (W × H × D)
Weight
23 g
Note The 10-ms OFF-delay timer function can be turned OFF.
165
Appendix A
Specifications
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module
Power supply voltage
Item
Rating
9 VDC (supplied from Sensor Unit)
Current consumption
Response time
50 mA max.
1.5 ms max.
Timer function
Indicators
10-ms OFF-delay timer (see note)
Operation indicator (orange) and stability operation indicator (green)
Teaching monitor
Indicators (operation indicator and stability operation indicator are
used)
Output mode
Dimension (mm)
Light ON and Dark ON (selectable)
28.1 × 17.8 × 62.1 (W × H × D)
Weight
26 g
Note The 10-ms OFF-delay timer function can be turned OFF.
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module
Item
Power supply voltage
Current consumption
Sensing dis- Setting for Teaching
tance adjust- without Sensing Object
ment range (see note 2)
(see note 1)
Setting for Teaching
with Sensing Object
and Teaching for Position Control
Temperature influence
Differential travel
Rating
9 VDC (supplied from Sensor Unit)
50 mA max.
E2C-CR5B
0.45 mm min.
E2C-CR8A
E2C-CR8B
0.72 mm min.
E2C-X1A
E2C-C1A
0.9 mm min.
E2C-X1R5A
1.35 mm min.
0.1 to 0.7 mm
0.16 to 1.2 mm
0.2 to 1.5 mm
0.3 to 2 mm
±25% max. of
sensing distance
at 23°C between
0 and 55°C
±10% max. of sensing distance at 23°C between 0 and 55°C
Response delay
15% max. of rated 10% max. of rated sensing distance
sensing distance
Refer to the response frequency for the proximity sensor
Output type
Timer functions
NO (ON when sensing object detected)
Off-delay timer fixed at 10 ms (see note 3)
Cable length compensation
Indicators
Mode set via four ganged switches
Operation indicator (orange) and stability indicator (green)
Teaching monitor
Dimension (mm)
Indicator (orange/green indicator: operation, using stability indicator)
28.1 × 17.8 × 62.1 (W × H × D)
Weight
26 g
Note 1. Perform positioning teaching within the stable sensing range. Even if teaching is performed successfully outside the stable sensing range, the E2C-MA11 in operation may not reset properly. Furthermore, even if teaching is performed successfully with or without a sensing object, the E2C-MA11 may
not reset properly after a delicate change is detected.
2. With no surrounding metal or background objects.
3. Off-delay timer can also be turned off with a switch.
166
Appendix A
Specifications
Dimensions
CQM1-SEN01 Sensor Unit
7
8.5
3
110
35.4
3
4.5
32
120
CQM1-TU001 Remote Console
Operation indicator
52.9
Stability operation indicator
Teaching
indicator
16.5
Module
selector
145
Mode
setting
selector
Teaching
button
15
40
3,000
42
10.2 dia.
12 dia.
167
Appendix A
Specifications
E3X-MA11 Optical Fiber Photoelectric Module
Stability operation indicator
Operation
indicator
Fiber lock lever
28.1
17.8
60
26.5
2.1
Teaching button
Timer selector
Operation mode selector
Mode setting selector
E3C-MA11 Photoelectric Module
Operation
indicator
Four, M2.6 x 6
28.1
Stability operation indicator
17.8
60
26.5
2.1
Timer selector
Operation mode selector
Mode setting selector
Teaching
button
E2C-MA11 Proximity Sensor Module
Four, M2.6 x 6
Operation
indicator
28.1
Stability operation indicator
17.8
60
26.5
Teaching
button
168
2.1
Timer selector
Mode setting selector
Code length
selector
Appendix A
Specifications
Sensor Specifications
The following table lists combinations of typical sensors that can be used in combination with each sensor
module.
E3X-MA11
Item
Sensing
method
Feature
Thru-beam model
Long sensing
distance
Standard
sensing
distance
Model
Sensing distance
(standard sensing
object)
E32-T11L
500 mm
(1,200 mm)
(see note 1)
(1.4 dia. mm
min. non-transparent object)
E32-TC200
270 mm
(2,000 mm)
(see note 1)
(1 dia. mm
min. nontransparent
object)
Minimum sensing
object (non-transparent object)
0.2 dia. mm
Ambient operating
temperature
–40° to 70°C with no icing
Ambient operating
humidity
35% to 85%
Side view
thru-beam
model
Flexible cable Long sensing
distance
Heat-resistive
thru-beam
model
Resisting
150°C
Screen thrubeam model
E32-T11
240 mm
(1,300 mm)
(see note 1)
(1 dia. mm
min. nontransparent
object)
E32-T14L
130 mm (
1 dia. mm min.
non-transparent object)
E32-T51
300 mm
(1.5 dia. mm
min. non-transparent object)
E32-T16
1,000 mm
(see note 2)
(view: 10 mm
wide) (10 dia.
mm min. nontransparent
object)
0.3 dia. mm
0.4 dia. mm
0.2 dia. mm
(see note 2)
–40° to 150°C
with no icing
(see note 3)
–40° to 70°C
with no icing
Sensing a
width of 10
mm
Permissible bending 25 mm min.
radius
4 mm min.
25 mm min.
35 mm min.
25 mm min.
Cable covering
Black polyethylene
Vinyl chloride
Black polyethylene
Fluorocarbon
resin
Black polyethylene
Enclosure rating
IEC IP67
Note 1. Values in parentheses are possible if the E39-F1 Lens Unit is used.
2. The sensing distances of the E32T16 with slits are as follows:
0.5-mm wide slit: 450 mm with a minimum sensing object size of 0.2 mm dia.; 1.0-mm slit: 800 mm
with a minimum sensing object size of 0.3 mm dia.
3. The E32-T51 can be used continuously within a temperature range of –40° to 130°C.
169
Appendix A
Specifications
Item
Sensing
method
Reflective model
Side view
reflective
model
Flexible cable Long sensing
distance
Heat-resistive
reflective
model
Resisting
150°C
Feature
Long sensing
distance
Model
E32-D11L
Standard
sensing
distance
E32-DC200
150 mm (20 ×
20 cm)
100 mm (10 ×
10 cm)
60 mm (10 ×
10 cm)
40 mm (5 ×
5 cm)
60 mm (10 ×
10 cm)
50 mm (20 ×
20 cm)
20 mm (10 ×
10 cm)
15 mm (10 ×
10 cm)
8 mm (5 ×
5 cm)
12 mm (10 × 10 --cm)
Sensing
White
distance paper
(standard
sensing
object)
Black
paper
E32-D11
Minimum sensing
object (pure copper
wire)
0.015 dia. mm
Differential distance
Ambient operating
temperature
20% max. of the sensing distance
–40° to 70°C with no icing
Ambient operating
humidity
Permissible bending
radius
Cable covering
35% to 85%
25 mm min.
4 mm min.
Black polyethylene
vinyl chloride
Enclosure rating
IEC IP67
E32-D14L
E32-D51
0.03 dia. mm
Sensing a
transparent
object
E32-R21 and
E39-R3
25 to 250 mm
(35 dia. mm
min. nontransparent
object)
0.6 dia. mm
–40° to 150°C
with no icing
(see note)
–40° to 70°C
with no icing
25 mm min.
35 mm min.
25 mm min.
Black polyethylene
Fluorocarbon
resin
Black polyethylene
IEC IP67
Note The E32-D51 can be used continuously within a temperature range of –40° to 130°C.
170
Retroreflective model
Appendix A
Specifications
E3C-MA11
Item
Thru-beam model
E3C-S10
Sensing distance
Minimum sensing object
Standard sensing object
E3C-1
10 cm
2-mm nontransparent
object
---
1m
4-mm nontransparent
object
3° to 20°
E3C-2
2m
8-mm nontransparent
object
Limited reflective model
E3C-DS10
10 cm
3 ± 0.3 cm
10 × 10 cm
white paper
---
5 × 5 cm
white paper
1 × 1 cm
white paper
10% max.
±3% max.
1,000 lux
max.
Directional angle
10° to 60°
--20% max.
3,000 lux max. on the surface of each sensing object
Ambient operating temperature
–25° to 70°C with no icing
Ambient operating humidity
Vibration resistance
35% to 85%
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude in X,
Y, and Z directions for 2 hours each
Shock resistance
500 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
IEC IP64
IEC IP66 (water resistive)
IEC IP50
(drip proof)
10,000 lux max. on the surface of each sensing object
Item
Sensing distance
3,000 lux
max.
10 to 500 Hz, 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double
1.5-mm dou- amplitude in X, Y, and Z
ble amplidirections for 2 hours each
tude in X, Y,
and Z directions for 2
hours each
IEC IP64 (drip proof)
Reflective model for mark detection
E3C-VS1G
1 ± 0.2 cm
E3C-VS3R
3 ± 0.5 cm
E3C-VM35R
3.5 ± 0.5 cm
Minimum sensing mark (black mark on 0.9 mm at the
1.6 mm at the
0.2 mm at the
white paper)
center of the
center of the
center of the
sensing distance
sensing distance
sensing distance
Ambient operating Incandescent
1,000 lux max. on the surface of each sensing object.
illumination
lamp
Sunlight
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
E3C-LS3R
5 cm
---
Differential distance
Ambient
Incandesoperating
cent lamp
illumination
Sunlight
Enclosure rating
3° to 15°
Diffuse
reflective
model
E3C-DS5W
3,000 lux max. on the surface of each sensing object
–10° to 70°C with no icing
–25° to 70°C with
no icing
35% to 85%
E3C-VS7R
7 ± 1.0 cm
0.6 mm at the
center of the
sensing distance
–10° to 70°C with
no icing
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude in X, Y, and Z directions for 2 hours each
Enclosure rating
IEC IP64 (drip proof)
500 m/s2
IEC IP50 (drip proof)
171
Appendix A
Specifications
Model
Thru-beam model
E3C-S10
E3C-1
E3C-2
Suggested cable
Shielded round cable with
polyethylene insulation
A single shielded cable, with vinyl
insulation, and conductor with a cross
section of 0.3 mm2 min.
Shield
White
(polyethylene)
Shield
White
(vinyl)
Gray (vinyl sheath)
2.4 dia.
12-strand wire/0.18 dia.
Reflective model
E3C-DS10
E3C-VS1G
E3C-VS3R
E3C-LS3R
Substitute cable
Shielded parallel cable with vinyl
insulation
If the shielded parallel cable with vinyl insulation is not available, use two single-conductor
shielded vinyl cables.
Sheath
Internal
sheath
Shield
2.4
Polyethylene
4.3
Conductor
12-strand wire/0.18 dia.
Reflective model
E3C-DS5W
E3C-VS7R
E3C-VM35R
Shielded parallel cable with vinyl
insulation
Sheath
Shield
Polyethylene
7-strand wire/0.18 dia.
Conductor
172
If the shielded parallel cable with vinyl insulation is not available, use two single-conductor
shielded vinyl cables.
Appendix A
Specifications
E2C-MA11
The following table gives the characteristics for Sensors combined with the Module. Other E2C-series sensors
cannot be connected to the Module.
Item
Model
E2C-CR5B
E2C-CR8A
E2C-CR8B
E2C-X1A
E2C-C1A
E2C-X1R5A
Sensing object
Standard reference object
Magnetic metal
Iron: 5 × 5 × 1 mm
Stable sensing range (over rated temperature range)
0 to 0.5 mm
0 to 0.8 mm
0 to 1 mm
0 to 1.5 mm
Stable sensing range (0 to 40°C)
Response frequency (see note 1)
0 to 0.7 mm
1 kHz
0 to 1.2 mm
0 to 1.5 mm
0 to 2 mm
800 Hz
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
–10 to 55°C
35% to 95%
–25 to 70°C (no icing)
Temperature influence
±25% max. of
sensing distance
between –10 and
55°C (tested at
23°C)
±15% max. of sensing distance between –25 and 70°C
(tested at 23°C)
Vibration resistance
Destruction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude for 2 hrs each in X and Y
directions
Shock resistance
Destruction: 500 m/s2 3 times each in X and Y directions
IEC IP64
IEC IP67
Enclosure rating
Cable length (see note 2)
Weight (with 3-m cable)
Materials
Cable
Case
Sensing surface
Iron: 8 × 8 × 1 mm
3 m shielded cable 3 m (standard) high-frequency coaxial cable; max. length:
5m
10 g approx.
40 g approx.
45 g approx.
50 g approx.
Stainless steel
ABS resin
Bronze
Polyethylene
Note 1. Measurement conditions: Standard reference object, sensing objects spaced at twice the width of the
standard reference object, sensing distance set at half of maximum distance.
2. Characteristic impedance of high-frequency coaxial cable: 50 Ω.
173
PART VII
Linear Sensor Interface Units
CQM1-LSE01
CQM1-LSE02
175
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section provides the features and system configuration relating to the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
1-1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
1-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
177
Section 1-1
Features
1-1
Features
• When the Linear Sensor Interface Unit is used in a system, linear sensor
input signals received by the Unit are converted into appropriate numeric
values according to preset scaling values.
• The Linear Sensor Interface Unit compares the scaled conversion data
with the four comparison set values (HH, H, L, and LL), ensuring the ease
of object discrimination.
• The four timing hold modes that are synchronized with the external signal
input allow free setting of the input data sampling point and easy retrieval
or control of desired data.
• The CQM1-LSE02 can convert input data into voltage output, which can
be used as data for external monitoring.
• The teaching function enables the Linear Sensor Interface Unit to use
actual input as scaling and comparison set values, thus ensuring the easy
adjustment.
• The zero point (measurement standard point) can be forced, which allows
relative object measurement.
• A ladder program can be used to enable the CQM1-LSE02 to have voltage output. The ladder program used with the CQM1-LSE02 enables the
output voltage to correspond to the data.
• The Programming Console can be used to easily set the Linear Sensor
Interface Unit to its initial values.
Linear Sensor Interface
Units
178
Model
Type
CQM1-LSE01
Standard
CQM1-LSE02
With monitor output
Section 1-2
System Configuration
1-2
System Configuration
Power Supply
CQM1H/CQM1-series
CPU
Linear Sensor
Interface
Other Units
Sensor input
(V INPUT/I INPUT)
Monitor output
(OUTPUT)
Timing input
(T/G)
• Use the Programming Console to write its initial values to the Unit.
• The Unit needs zero input and zero reset input for forced zero.
• The CQM1-LSE01 does not have monitor output.
Word Number
The word allocations for a CQM1H/CQM1-series Dedicated I/O Unit are as
follows.
Input: 001 to 015
Output: 100 to 115
The Unit uses a single input word and single output word. The CQM1-LSE01,
which is not provided with the monitor output function, also uses a single output word.
Words are allocated in left-to-right order to the CQM1H/CQM1-series Dedicated I/O Units mounted to the PC. For example, if an Input Unit that occupies
one word, an Output Unit that occupies two words, and the CQM1-LSE01/
LSE02 are mounted to the PC and if the Input Unit and Output Unit are
located to the left of the CQM1-LSE01/LSE02, the input and output word
numbers of the CQM1-LSE01/LSE02 will be 002 and 102 respectively.
Input Unit located on the left side
Input word
to
CPU
to
Output word
Output Unit located
on the left side
CQM1-LSE01/LSE02
179
SECTION 2
Functions
This section provides an explanation of the scaling, timing hold, data input, teaching, forced zero, and monitor output
functions.
2-1
Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
2-2
Timing Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
2-3
Scaled Conversion Data/Comparison Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
2-4
Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
2-5
Forced Zero (Zero-shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
2-6
Voltage Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
181
Section 2-1
Scaling
2-1
Scaling
The conversion of input voltage or current in a certain range to a value in a
certain range is called scaling. For example, if the user converts input voltage
or current so to be displayed as a percentage, the converted value will be displayed in the range 0 through 100. The following is the scaling method.
The following graph shows the relationship between input to the Unit and the
values converted from the input. In this graph, Y1 is converted data corresponding to input data X1 and Y2 is a converted data corresponding to input
data X2.
Scaled conversion data
Input
As shown in the above graph, it is possible to obtain scaled conversion data
(Y) corresponding to input data (X).
Example for Measuring Lengths Using a Sensor with an Input of 4 to
20 mA
If the output of the sensor is 4 mA when the length of the object sensed by the
sensor is 10 centimeters and the output of the sensor is 15 mA when the
length of the object is 30 centimeters, the following data should be input.
X1 = 400, X2 = 1500, Y1 = 1000, Y2 = 3000
If the input from the sensor is 10 mA, a value corresponding to the input will
be 2091 (i.e., 20.91 centimeters) in this case.
X1 can be larger or smaller than X2. Therefore, Y1 can be larger or smaller
than Y2.
182
Section 2-2
Timing Hold
Reference
When scaling is conducted, the scaled conversion data may exceed the range
between 9999 and –9999 even if the input values are within the permissible
range. The scaled conversion data that fall outside the permissible measurement range are treated as overflow values. The input values that fall outside
the permissible range (over-range) are also treated as overflow values.
Scaled conversion data
9999
Lower limit
Upper limit
Input
−9999
Permissible
measurement
range
Overflow
2-2
Timing Hold
The Unit takes samplings of input values that are input from the linear sensor,
computes them, and then holds the computed values. Any of the following timing hold types can be selected for the Unit.
• Normal
• Sampling hold
• Maximum hold
• Minimum hold
• Peak-to-peak hold
Normal
If the timing hold is set to normal, the TIMING input is not effective, and the
Unit continues sampling. The reset input is not effective.
Sampling Hold
If the timing hold is set to sampling hold, the Unit samples the data at the rising edge of the timing input to the Unit when the TIMING input is turned ON.
The Unit stops data sampling during the following periods. The data is
“BBBB.”
[1] From the moment the Unit is turned ON until the first TIMING input is
turned ON.
183
Section 2-2
Timing Hold
[2] From the moment the reset input is turned ON until the TIMING input is
turned ON for the first time after the reset input is turned OFF.
Power on
[1]
[2]
Scaled conversion data
Input
TIMING input
Reset input
Maximum Hold
If the timing hold mode is set to maximum hold, the Unit continues data sampling while the TIMING input is ON.
• When the TIMING input is turned OFF and the measurement mode is
selected using the data input function, the maximum value of the input
data sampled between the leading and trailing edge of the timing input is
stored in the input word as the scaled conversion data.
• When the TIMING input is turned OFF and the comparison mode is
selected using the data input function, the comparison result flags of the
input word are turned ON or OFF according to the comparison result processed by the Unit.
The Unit stops data sampling during the following periods, The scaled conversion data is “BBBB.”
[1] From the moment the Unit is turned ON until the first timing input is turned
ON and OFF.
[2] From the moment the reset input is turned ON until the timing input is ON
and OFF for the first time after the reset input is turned OFF.
Sensing section
Power on
[1]
[2]
Scaled conversion data
Input
TIMING input
Reset input
Minimum Hold
184
If the timing hold mode is set to minimum hold, the Unit continues data sampling while the TIMING input is ON.
• When the TIMING input is turned OFF and the measurement mode is
selected using the data input function, the minimum value of the input
data sampled between the leading and trailing edge of the timing input is
stored in the input word as the scaled conversion data.
• When the TIMING input is turned OFF and the comparison mode is
selected using the data input function, the comparison result flags of the
input word are turned ON or OFF according to the comparison result processed by the Unit.
The Unit stops data sampling during the following periods, The scaled conversion data is “BBBB.”
Section 2-2
Timing Hold
[1] From the moment the Unit is turned ON until the first timing input is turned
ON and OFF.
[2] From the moment the reset input is turned ON until the timing input is ON
and OFF for the first time after the reset input is turned OFF.
Power on
[1]
Sensing section
Scaled conversion data
[2]
Input
TIMING input
Reset input
Peak-to-peak Hold
If the timing hold mode is set to peak-to-peak hold, the Unit continues data
sampling while the TIMING input is ON.
• When the TIMING input is turned OFF and the measurement mode is
selected using the data input function, the difference between the maximum value and minimum value of the input data sampled between the
leading and trailing edge of the timing input is stored in the input word as
the scaled conversion data.
• When the TIMING input is turned OFF and the comparison mode is
selected using the data input function, the comparison result flags of the
input word are turned ON or OFF according to the comparison result processed by the Unit.
The Unit stops data sampling during the following periods, The scaled conversion data is “BBBB.”
[1] From the moment the Unit is turned ON until the first timing input is turned
ON and OFF.
[2] From the moment the reset input is turned ON until the timing input is ON
and OFF for the first time after the reset input is turned OFF.
Power on
Sensing section
[1]
[2]
c–d
Input
b–a
Scaled conversion data
TIMING input
Reset input
Available Commands and Functions
Function (Command code)
Normal
Scaling Value Teach (C5*0)
Yes
Set Value Teach (C8*0)
Yes
Present Value Read: BCD (CC00) Yes
Timing Hold
Sampling Hold Maximum Hold Minimum Hold
Peak-to-peak
Hold
Command Error (Word status: E003)
185
Section 2-3
Scaled Conversion Data/Comparison Result
Function (Command code)
Normal
Forced-zero Shift
(ZERO external control input)
Hysteresis Set (CA00)
Hysteresis Read (CB00)
2-3
Yes
Yes
Timing Hold
Sampling Hold Maximum Hold Minimum Hold
Peak-to-peak
Hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Zero input will
be ignored.
Commands are received, but the hysteresis function is invalid.
Scaled Conversion Data/Comparison Result
Either of the following is stored in the input word.
• Scaled conversion data
• Result of comparison between the set value and the scaled conversion
data
Scaled Conversion Data
The binary-coded scaled conversion data is stored in the input word allocated
to the Unit.
Comparison Results
The comparison result of the value is obtained by comparing the preset HH,
H, L, and LL comparison set values and the scaled conversion data. The following bits will be turned ON according to the result.
• HH: The HH bit of the input word will be ON if the present scaled conversion data equals or is greater than the HH set value.
• H: The H bit of the input word will be ON if the present scaled conversion
data equals or is greater than the H set value.
• L: The L bit of the input word will be ON if the present scaled conversion
data equals or is less than the L set value.
• LL: The LL bit of the input word will be ON if the present scaled conversion data equals or is less than the LL set value.
The PASS bit of the input word will be ON in other cases.
If the Unit is in normal hold mode, the hysteresis of the present scaled conversion data will be effective when any of the above bits is turned OFF.
The following is an example of data comparison. The timing hold is set to normal.
Scaled conversion data
Comparative
set value
Input word
Hysteresis
186
Hysteresis
Section 2-4
Teaching
2-4
Teaching
The teaching function is can be set only when the timing hold in operation
mode A is set to normal.
The Programming Console makes it possible to adjust the scaling and set values preset on the Unit using objects.
Scaling Value Teach
When the scaling value teach command is executed, the actual input value
can be set as the X1 or X2.
This allows an easy adjustment of the input error.
For example, when setting the X1 value as an input value of the smallest
object, execute a scaling command while the smallest object is being sampled. In the same manner, the X2 value can be set as the largest object input
value if the scaling command is executed while the largest object is being
sampled.
Sensor input
Smallest object
Actual size
X1 value
Adjustment value
Set Value Teaching
By using the set value teach command, an actual input value can be set as
the HH, H, L, or LL set value. It is useful for making judgments on whether
products are acceptable or defective.
For example, when setting the lowest set value LL, execute the set value
teach command while the smallest object is being measured. If the same
command is executed while the largest object is being measured, the highest
set value HH can be set.
Sensor input
Smallest object
Actual size
LL set value
Adjustment value
187
Section 2-5
Forced Zero (Zero-shift)
2-5
Forced Zero (Zero-shift)
The forced zero function enables the Unit to shift the scaled conversion data
to 0 to calibrate, which allows relative object measurement with ease.
The forced zero state stays in effect until ZERO RESET input signal to the
Unit is turned ON.
Input
Calibrated
scaled conversion data
ZERO input
ZERO RESET input
ZERO indicator
When zero input is turned ON while the Unit is sampling data, the scaled conversion data will be shifted to zero and stored as binary data in the input word,
or the comparison result flags of the input word are turned ON or OFF according to the comparison result processed by the Unit.
The nonvolatile memory can store the zero shift value.
While the forced-zero state stays in effect, the ZERO indicator is lit.
Note The forced zero function is not effective when the timing hold mode is set to
peak-to-peak hold.
2-6
Voltage Monitor Output
The CQM1-LSE02 has a voltage monitor output function.
Scaled conversion data monitor mode or set data D/A output mode can be
selected.
The Unit refreshes its monitor output at 0.5-s intervals.
Scaled Conversion Data
Monitor Mode
188
In this mode, it is possible to output voltage corresponding to the scaled conversion data.
Section 2-6
Voltage Monitor Output
Example of Scaling into the Data between 0000 to 5000 for the Input
between 4 to 20 mA
When the input is 12 mA, the scaled conversion data becomes 2500 and the
output voltage that corresponds to this value becomes 2.5 V.
Output voltage (V)
Scaled conversion data
9.999
5000
2500
2.5
–9999
0
4
12
20
Input value (mA)
2500
9999
Scaled conversion data
(decimal)
–9.999
Set Data D/A Output Mode
In this mode, the monitor output terminal of the CQM1-LSE02 will have voltage output corresponding to the signed binary data stored in the output word
of the CQM1-LSE02 by easy use of the ladder program.
The signed binary data range of the CQM1-LSE02 is from –9999 (D8F1) to
9999 (270F) and the voltage output range of the CQM1-LSE02 corresponding
to the signed binary data range is from –9.999 to 9.999 V.
If the signed binary data out of the range is stored in the output word, either
–9.999 or 9.999 V will be output. For example, if the signed binary data D8F0
(–10000 in BCD) is written, the voltage of the monitor output will be –9.999 V.
Note In case of using the Unit in the set data D/A output mode, when obtaining the
value to be set to the output word through calculation using the ladder program, etc., be careful not to use the computed result of “C000 to CFFF.” Even
when the Unit is used in the set data D/A output mode, if “C000 to CFFF” is
set to the output word, it is treated as a command.
In this mode, analog input is converted into digital data and then converted
into analog output. Therefore, the obtained analog output is not highly precise.
189
SECTION 3
Nomenclature and Functions
This section provides the nomenclature, and terminal and indicator functions of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
3-1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
3-2
Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
191
Section 3-1
Nomenclature
3-1
Nomenclature
Front View
Indicators
Indicators
RDY
Name
Color
Green
TIMING/GATE
Orange
Function
Lit when the Linear Sensor Interface Unit is ready for
use.
Lit when an internal error, such as IC malfunctioning,
occurs.
Lit when 1- to 5-V or 4- to 20-mA input to the Unit is disconnected. This indicator cannot be used to detect the
disconnection of ±9.999- or ±5-V input.
Lit when TIMING or GATE input to the Unit is ON.
ERR
Red
ZERO
Orange
Lit when the forced zero function is effective.
BROKEN-WIRE Red
Side View
Slide lock
Cover
Terminals
Slide lock
192
Section 3-2
Terminals
3-2
Terminals
–
+
+
–
+
–
+24
VDC
+24
VDC
V INPUT
Connect a linear sensor with voltage output to this terminal. The available voltage ranges of the V INPUT terminal are from –9.999 to 9.999, from –5 to 5,
and from 1 to 5 V.
I INPUT
Connect a linear sensor with a current output range from 4 to 20 mA to this
terminal.
COM
Common terminal for the V INPUT and I INPUT terminals.
OUTPUT
Monitor output terminal for the CQM1-LSE02.
T/G
Timing input terminal. If the timing hold is set to sampling hold, the Unit will be
in data sampling operation at the moment timing input is turned ON. If the timing hold is set to maximum hold, minimum hold, or peak-to-peak hold, the Unit
will be in data sampling operation while timing input is ON. This terminal is not
used by if the timing hold is set to normal.
RES
Reset input terminal. When reset input is turned ON, the Unit will no longer be
in HOLD mode. This terminal is used if the Unit is set to any timing hold other
than normal.
ZERO
Zero input terminal. When zero input is turned ON, the Unit will forcibly shift
the scaled conversion data to zero and the Unit will continue operating.
ZRES
Zero reset terminal. The forced-zero state is canceled when zero reset input
turned ON.
!Caution Do not use the unused terminals for relaying signals.
193
SECTION 4
Connections
This section describes the connections of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
4-1
Mounting and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
195
Section 4-1
Mounting and Wiring
4-1
Mounting and Wiring
Mounting
Refer to the CQM1H Operation Manual (W363) or the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226) before mounting this Unit to the PC.
Wiring
Refer to 3-2 Terminals for the wiring of the terminals.
!Caution
• Make sure that the polarity of each input line connecting to the terminals
is correct.
• It is possible that the terminal block may become disconnected from the
Unit. After the terminals are wired, make sure that the terminal block is
properly connected to the Unit.
Connection Terminals
Connect each input line to the terminal using a solderless terminal.
Do not tighten any screw of the terminals to a torque exceeding 0.5 N • m.
Use either of the following types of M3 solderless terminals for the input lines
connecting to the terminals.
6.2 mm max.
6.2 mm max.
Crimp Connectors
196
Crimp connectors for wiring should be less than 6.2 mm wide (M3), and the
wire should be AWG22 to 18 (0.25 to 1.65 mm2).
SECTION 5
Basic Operation
This section describes the basic operation of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit using the Programming Console.
5-1
Operating Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
5-2
Programming Console Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
5-3
Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
5-4
Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
5-5
Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
5-6
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
197
Section 5-1
Operating Method
5-1
Operating Method
Initial parameter
settings
Set the operation
mode.
Set the scaling
values.
Is the Unit in
comparison
mode?
N
Y
Set the set values.
Is the Unit in
normal hold
mode?
N
Y
Set the hysteresis.
End
Monitoring
Initial Parameter Settings
1,2,3...
Use the Programming Console to write the initial parameters to the output
word of the Unit.
1. Execute the operation mode A set command or operation mode B set command to determine the operation mode.
2. Determine the scaling values.
3. Determine the set values if the Unit is used in comparison mode.
4. Execute the operation mode A set command to determine the hysteresis if
the timing hold type is set to normal.
Monitoring
Use a ladder program to retrieve the input word data for monitoring. The input
word data is the scaled conversion data if the Unit is in measurement mode.
The input word data is a comparison result if the Unit is in comparison mode.
Note The scaling values and zero shift value will be reset to the factory-set values.
if the input type is changed with the operation mode A set command. Be sure
to set the scaling values and zero shift value properly after the input type is
changed with the operation mode A set command.
The command operation examples in the following section are described on
the condition that the output word state before and after command operation
be set to “0000.”
It must be noted that, if the Unit is used in the set data D/A output mode, the
output is specified to be 0 V. Therefore, set a desired output value instead of
“0000” in actual operation.
198
Section 5-2
Programming Console Operation
5-2
Programming Console Operation
Refer to the CQM1H Operation Manual (W363) or the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226) for the detailed operating method of the Programming Console.
The operation of the Programming Console required for the initial settings is
explained below.
Initial Screen
Operate the Programming Console as described below so that the default
screen of the Programming Console in program mode will appear.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Programming Console to the CQM1H/CQM1 CPU, set the
mode selector of the Programming Console to PROGRAM MODE, and
supply power to the Programming Console.
Password
2. Input the password.
MONTR
CLR
3. The default screen will appear.
CLR
I/O Words
The contents of the I/O words will appear on the screen of the Programming
Console. When measured mode is selected for data input, the present binarycoded scaled conversion data will appear under the input word display.
1,2,3...
1. The input word (word 001 in this example) will be displayed.
A
CH
SHIFT
A
0
*
B
0
1
MONTR
?
2. The output word (word 100 in this example) will be displayed.
Output word Input word
CH
SHIFT
Command
A
B
1
*
A
0
0
MONTR
? ?
The command codes can be set to output word. In this example, descriptions
are given for the operation mode A.
1,2,3...
1. The command code is set to the output word. The response for the command will appear under the input word display.
C
C
CHG
SHIFT
A
2
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
+ +
199
Section 5-3
Operation Mode
2. If any parameter is used, the contents of the output word will be replaced
with the parameter. The response to the parameter will appear under the
input word display.
C
CHG
5-3
Settings
C
2
2
D
3
B
1
WRITE
? ?
!
!
Operation Mode
The operation mode is selected with the operation mode A set command or
operation mode B set command.
The following four items can be selected for the Unit with the operation mode
A set command.
• Data Input
Measurement Mode or Comparison Mode:
When the Unit is in measurement mode, the binary-coded scaled conversion data is stored in the input word allocated to the Unit. When the Unit is
in comparison mode, the Comparison Result Flags of the input word allocated to the Unit are turned ON or OFF after comparing the set value and
scaled conversion data. When any overrange or sensor disconnection is
detected by the Unit, the Overrange or Sensor Disconnection Flag of the
input word is turned ON. The measurement mode is the factory setting.
• Timing Hold
Normal, Sampling Hold, Maximum Hold, Minimum Hold, Peak-topeak Hold:
When setting the initial values, one of the five timing holds can be
selected for the Unit. The timing hold is factory-set to normal.
• Input Type
±9.999 V, ±5 V, 1 to 5 V, or 4 to 20 mA:
When setting the initial values, any input type among four input types can
be selected for the Unit. The ±9.999 V input type is the factory setting.
• Monitor Output (CQM1-LSE02 Only)
Scaled Conversion Data Monitor Mode or Set Data D/A Output Mode:
The CQM1-LSE02 has a monitor output terminal, to which simple monitoring devices, such as the K3TE Digital Panel Meter, can be connected.
In the scaled conversion data monitor mode, the Unit outputs the voltage
corresponding to the scaled conversion data. In the set data D/A output
mode, the monitor output terminal has voltage output corresponding to
the data which is written to the output word allocated to the Unit. The
scaled conversion data monitor mode is the factory setting.
It is possible to select any of the following three items for the Unit with the
operation mode B set command.
• Input Sampling Speed
Fast or Slow:
The sampling time and period can be set to fast or slow according to the
type of sensing object considering the relationship between the measuring accuracy and measuring speed. The sampling time/period is factoryset to slow.
• Number of Averaging Process Times
1, 2, 4, 8, or 16:
For more precise sampling, it is possible to take an average of a designated number of samples. The number is factory-set to 4.
200
Section 5-3
Operation Mode
• Zero Shift Value Storage Area
RAM or Nonvolatile Memory:
The Unit has a forced zero function that will become active with external
signal input to the Unit. The RAM or nonvolatile memory can be selected
to store the zero shift value. The RAM is factory-set to store the zero shift
value.
Note The zero shift value stored in the RAM will be lost when the Unit is turned
OFF. The RAM should be used to store the zero shift value if the forced zero
function is frequently used. The zero shift value stored in the nonvolatile memory will not be lost when the Unit is turned OFF. The zero shift value stored in
the nonvolatile memory may not be, however, used more than 100,000 times.
Decide where to keep the zero shift value according to the application.
Command
Each operation mode set command consists of a command code and parameter. The following command codes are used for the operation mode A and
operation mode B set commands.
• Operation Mode A:C000
• Operation Mode B:C200
Refer to pages 218 to 221 for the details of the parameters used for the Unit.
Setting Example
In this example, the following operation modes are selected for the Unit.
• Data Input:
Comparison mode
• Timing Hold Mode:
Normal
• Input Type:
4 to 20 mA
• Monitor Output:
Scaled conversion data monitor mode
• Input Sampling Speed: Fast
• No. of Averaging Process Times: 1
• Zero Shift Value Storage Area: RAM
In this example, the initial parameters have been set. Described below is the
method of changing the data input and input type using the operation mode A
set command.
Operation
1,2,3...
1. The input word reads 1254, which is the present scaled conversion data,
and the output word reads 0000.
Output word Input word
? ?
#"
2. Set the command code C1000 to the output word to in order to set the operation mode A. To input the letter C with the Programming Console, press
the Shift and 2 Keys.
The input word will be set to the response C000.
C
C
CHG
SHIFT
2
A
A
A
0
0
0
WRITE
? ?
+ +
201
Section 5-4
Scaling
3. Set 2040 to the output word. The Unit will be in comparison mode and the
available input range will be from 4 to 20 mA. All the other modes will remain unchanged.
A
C
2
CHG
A
E
0
4
0
WRITE
? ?
" "
4. When the Unit correctly receives the command, the input word will be set
to 2040.
5. Reset 0000 to the output word.
6. The Comparison Result Flags of the input word is turned ON or OFF. In this
example, the input word is set to 0004 (PASS).
A
CHG
5-4
A
0
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
"
Scaling
The setting method of the scaling values is explained below. Refer to 6-1 Scaling Value Teaching for the method to obtain the scaling values from the teaching operation.
Settings
Scales input values into desired values within a range from –9999 to 9999. X2
– Y2 and X1 – Y1 must be input (X: input value, Y: corresponding display
data). The X1 value must be different from the X2 value, otherwise the Unit
will process them as an overrange value of B000.
Default Values
The following are the factory-set scaling values.
X1:
X2:
Y1:
Y2:
0
1000
0
1000
Display data
Input value
Therefore, if the Unit is operated with the factory-set scaling values with an
input range from 4 to 20 mA, an input of 4 mA will be regarded as 400 and an
input of 20 mA will be regarded as 2000. When the input type is “1 to 5 V,” an
input of 1 V will be 1000 and that of 5V will be 5000. When the input type is
“–9999 to 9999 V,” an input of 9,999 V will be 9999 and that of –9999 V will be
–9999.
202
Section 5-4
Scaling
The graph below shows the relationship between the actual input values and
the internal data.
(9999)
(5000)
(2000)
(1000)
(400)
–9.999 V
–5 V
Input
(–5000)
(–9999)
Command
The scaling value set command consists of a command code and parameter.
The following command codes are used to set the X1, X2, Y1, and Y2 scaling
values.
• X1 Scaling Value Set:
C40@
• X2 Scaling Value Set:
C41@
• Y1 Scaling Value Set:
C42@
• Y2 Scaling Value Set:
C43@
Each of the above scaling values has the suffix @, which should be replaced
with 0 if the value is positive and F if the value is negative when they are input.
The parameter range of each of the above scaling values is 0000 to 9999.
Refer to page 222 for the details of the scaling value set command.
Setting Example
In this example, the following scaling values are selected for the Unit.
X1:
X2:
Y1:
Y2:
400
2000
0000
1000
This means an input of 4 to 20 mA is scaled to binary data of “0 to 1000” and
then converted into percentage data to the first decimal place.
In this example, the factory-set operation mode and scaling values have been
set.
Operation
1,2,3...
1. The input word reads 1254, which is the present scaled conversion data,
and the output word reads 0000.
Output word Input word
? ?
#"
203
Section 5-4
Scaling
2. Set the command code C400 for the X1 value. To input the letter C with the
Programming Console, press the Shift and 2 Keys. The input word will be
set to the response C400.
C
C
CHG
SHIFT
2
A
E
4
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
+" +"
3. Set 0400 to the output word.
4. When the Unit correctly receives the command, the input word will be set
to 0400.
A
A
E
0
CHG
4
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
" "
5. Input the command code C410 for the X2 value. The input word will be set
to the response C410.
C
C
CHG
SHIFT
2
E
A
B
4
0
1
WRITE
? ?
+" +"
6. Set 2000 to the output word.
7. When the Unit correctly receives the command, the input word will be set
to 2000.
A
C
2
CHG
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
C
E
C
CHG
4
2
SHIFT
A
C
0
2
WRITE
? ?
+" +"
8. Set 0000 for the Y1 value and 1000 for the Y2 value using the above method.
A
A
0
CHG
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
C
E
C
CHG
A
B
CHG
204
1
4
2
SHIFT
A
0
3
A
0
A
D
0
WRITE
? ?
+"! +"!
? ?
0
WRITE
Section 5-5
Comparison
9. After setting all the scaling values, reset 0000 to the output word. After the
scaling operation, 0534 will be set to the input word.
A
CHG
5-5
A
A
0
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
#!"
Comparison
The comparison function is effective only when the timing hold in operation
mode A is set to normal.
The setting methods of the set values and hysteresis to compare the present
scaled conversion data and the set values are explained below.
The preset set values and hysteresis are effective only when the Unit is set to
comparison mode. The hysteresis is, however, available only if the timing hold
is set to normal. Use the operation mode A set command to change the timing
hold.
Refer to 6-2 Set Value Teaching for the method to obtain the set values from
the teaching operation.
Settings
Set the LL, L, H, and HH set values so that these set values are within a range
from –9999 to 9999. The following are the factory-set set values.
LL and L:
H and HH:
–9999
9999
Therefore, if the Unit is operated with the factory-set set values, the PASS bit
of the input word will be always ON.
Set the hysteresis to a value between 0001 and 0999 for the LL, L, H, and HH
set values. The factory-set value of the hysteresis is 0001.
Command
The set value set command consists of a command code and parameter. The
following command codes are used for the LL, L, H, and HH set values.
• LL Set Value:
C70@
• L Set Value:
C71@
• H Set Value:
C72@
• HH Set Value: C73@
Each of the above set values has the suffix @, which should be replaced with
0 if the value is positive and F if the value is negative when they are input. The
parameter range of each of the above set values is 0000 to 9999.
The hysteresis set command consists of the command code CA00 and
parameter. Set the hysteresis value to the parameter.
Refer to pages 224 to 226 for the details of the set value command.
Setting Example
Set the L set values to 0000 and the H set values to 2000 with the hysteresis
set to 0010. Each Comparison Result Flag is turned ON when the scaled conversion data is as follows.
L ≤ 0000, PASS = 0001 to 1999, H ≥ 2000
Operation
1,2,3...
1. The input word reads 1254, which is the present scaled conversion data,
and the output word reads 0000.
Output word Input word
? ?
#"
205
Section 5-5
Comparison
2. Input the set value set command code C710 for the L set value. To input
the letter C with the Programming Console, press the Shift and 2 Keys.
The input word will be set to the response C710.
C
C
CHG
A
B
2
SHIFT
7
1
0
WRITE
? ?
+% +%
3. Set 0000 to the output word.
4. When the Unit correctly receives the command, the input word will be set
to 0000.
A
A
0
CHG
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
5. Input the set value set command code C720 for the H set value. The input
word will be set to the response C720.
C
C
CHG
A
C
2
SHIFT
2
7
0
WRITE
? ?
+% +%
6. Set 2000 to the output word.
7. When the Unit correctly receives the command, the input word will be set
to 2000.
A
C
2
CHG
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
8. Input the hysteresis set command code CA00.
The input word will be set to the response CA00.
C
A
C
CHG
A
A
2
SHIFT
0
SHIFT
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
+) +)
9. Set 0010 to the output word.
10. When the Unit correctly receives the command, the input word will be set
to 0010.
A
A
0
CHG
A
B
0
1
0
WRITE
? ?
11. After setting all the set values, set the output word to 0000 again. The
scaled conversion data 1254 will be set to the input word.
A
CHG
206
A
0
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
#"
Section 5-6
Monitoring
5-6
Monitoring
The input word data is used to monitor the present scaled conversion data or
comparison result. To monitor the present scaled conversion data or comparison result by using a ladder program, set the mode select switch on the Programming Console to the OPERATION MODE and then retrieve the input
word data.
Measurement Mode
The input word in measurement mode will be a binary-coded scaled conversion data. For example, when the factory-set scaling values are used, the
input word will be set to 270F for +9999 and D8F1 (2’s complement) for
–9999.
If the scaled conversion data falls beyond the ±9999 range or if the input value
falls in the overrange zone, B000 (overflow) will be set to the input word.
If the present scaled conversion data is indefinite, BBBB will be set to the
input word.
Comparison Mode
The input word has flags for comparison results, overrange detection, and
sensor disconnection detection as shown below.
Overrange
Sensor disconnection
Refer to the following table for the ON and OFF conditions of the flags for the
comparison results.
ON
OFF
HH
Scaled conversion data ≥ HH set
value
Scaled conversion data < HH set
value – hysteresis
H
Scaled conversion data ≥ H set
value
Scaled conversion data ≤ L set
value
Scaled conversion data ≤ LL set
value
HH, H, L, and LL set values turned
OFF
Scaled conversion data < H set
value – hysteresis
Scaled conversion data > L set
value + hysteresis
Scaled conversion data > LL set
value + hysteresis
HH, H, L, or LL set values turned
ON
L
LL
PASS
If the Unit receiving 1- to 5-V or 4- to 20-mA input detects sensor disconnection, the Sensor Disconnection Flag will be ON and all the Comparison Result
Flags will be OFF.
If input to the Unit is not within the permissible input range, the Overrange
Flag will be ON. The status of each Comparison Result Flags will remain
unchanged.
207
SECTION 6
Applied Operation
This section describes the applied operation of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit using the Programming Console.
6-1
Scaling Value Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
6-2
Set Value Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
6-3
Forced-zero Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
6-4
BCD Value Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
6-5
Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
209
Section 6-1
Scaling Value Teaching
6-1
Scaling Value Teaching
The scaling value teach command can be used only when the timing hold in
operation mode A is set to normal.
It is possible to adjust the input scaling values by executing scaling value
teaching with the scaling value teach command. The scaling value teach command uses the following command codes.
• X1 Scaling Value: C500
• X2 Scaling Value: C510
Setting Example
In this example, each scaling value is set as shown below. The timing hold is
set to normal, and a 4-to 20-mA input sensor is connected to the Unit to measure objects.
X1:
X2:
Y1:
Y2:
0400
2000
0000
1000
Due to a sensor positional error, however, 0002 was obtained for the smallest
object of all the objects and 0996 (with 03E4 displayed on the Unit) was
obtained for the largest object of all the objects.
Therefore, using the teaching function, the X1 value needs adjustment for the
smallest object and the X2 value needs adjustment for the largest object.
Operation
For the Smallest Object
1,2,3...
1. Adjust the X1 value with the smallest object using the teaching function.
The input word reads 0002, which is the scaled conversion data of the
smallest object measured with the Unit, and the output word reads 0000.
Output word Input word
? ?
2. Set the scaling value teach command code C500 for the X1 value to the
output word. To input the letter C with the Programming Console, press the
Shift and 2 Keys. The input word will be set to the response C500.
C
C
CHG
2
SHIFT
A
F
A
0
5
0
WRITE
? ?
+# +#
3. Set 0000 to the output word. When the input word is set to 0000, which is
the scaled conversion data of the smallest object, the teaching for the X1
value has been correctly executed.
A
CHG
210
A
0
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
Section 6-2
Set Value Teaching
For the Largest Object
4. Adjust the X2 value with the largest object next. The input word reads 03E4
converted from 996, which is the scaled conversion data of the largest object measured with the Unit, and the output word reads 0000.
? ?
!-"
996
5. Set the scaling value teach command code C510 for the X2 value. The input word will be set to the response C510.
C
C
CHG
2
SHIFT
F
A
B
1
5
0
WRITE
? ?
+# +#
6. Set 0000 to the output word. When 03E8 is set to the input word, converted
from 1000 (i.e., the scaled conversion data of the largest object measured
with the Unit), the teaching for the X2 value has been correctly executed.
A
CHG
A
0
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
!-&
1000
To check the adjusted values, execute the scaling value read command with
the command code C600 or C610. The X1 value will read 0403 and the X2
value will read 1993.
6-2
Set Value Teaching
The set value teach command can be used for the Unit only when the timing
hold in operation mode A is set to normal.
It is possible to use appropriate sample objects and adjust the set scaling values by executing set value teaching with the set value teach command as follows.
• LL Set Value:
C800
• L Set Value:
C810
• H Set Value:
C820
• HH Set Value: C830
Setting Example
In this example, the timing hold is set to normal, and the L or H set value is
adjusted using the teach function. The L set value is used for the smallest
object of all the objects measured by the Unit and the H set value is used for
the largest object of all the objects. The Unit is set to measurement mode so
that the Unit will display the results of the operation.
Operation
For the Smallest Object
1,2,3...
1. Adjust the L value with the smallest object using the set value teaching
function. The input word reads 0100, which is the scaled conversion data
of the smallest object measured with the Unit, and the output word reads
0000.
Output word Input word
? ?
211
Section 6-3
Forced-zero Shift
2. Input the set value teach command code C810 for the L value. To input the
letter C with the Programming Console, press the Shift and 2 Keys. The input word will be set to the response C810.
C
C
CHG
A
B
2
SHIFT
8
1
0
WRITE
? ?
+& +&
3. Set 0000 to the output word. 0100 will be set to the input word.
A
A
0
CHG
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
For the Largest Object
4. Adjust the H value with the largest object next. The input word reads 1000,
which is the scaled conversion data of the largest object measured with the
Unit, and the output word reads 0000.
? ?
5. Input the set value teach command code C820 for the H value. The input
word will be set to the response C820.
C
C
CHG
A
C
2
SHIFT
8
2
0
WRITE
? ?
+& +&
6. Set 0000 to the output word again. The input word will be set to 1000.
A
CHG
A
0
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
To check the adjusted values, execute the set value read command with the
command code C910 or C920.
6-3
Forced-zero Shift
Use the forced-zero shift function to measure the relative values of objects
based on the standard value determined for the Unit. This function requires
ZERO and ZRES (zero reset) inputs to the Unit.
Sensor input
Side B
Measured
value
Side A
Object
Zero input ON
When zero input is turned ON while the Unit is sampling data, the scaled conversion data will be shifted to zero and stored as binary data in the input word,
212
Section 6-4
BCD Value Read
or the comparison result flags of the input word are turned ON or OFF according to the comparison result processed by the Unit.
After the above processing, the sampling is performed with side A treated as
the reference side. As the object moves, the Unit measures side B of the
object and the scaled conversion data indicates the difference between the
sides A and B.
Note
1. The forced-zero shift function is not effective when the timing hold is set to
peak-to-peak hold.
2. The zero shift value stored in the RAM will be lost when the Unit is turned
OFF. The RAM should be used to store the zero shift value if the zero shift
function is frequently used during operation. The zero shift value stored in
the nonvolatile memory will not be lost when the Unit is turned OFF. The
zero shift value stored in the nonvolatile memory may not be, however,
used more than 100,000 times. Decide where to keep the zero shift value
according to the application.
Reference
6-4
The Unit ignores zero input when zero reset input is ON. Use the operation
mode B set command to select the RAM or nonvolatile memory to store the
zero shift value.
BCD Value Read
The present scaled conversion data can be read in BCD only when the timing
hold in operation mode A is set to normal.
Use the present value read command and take the following steps to read the
present scaled conversion data in BCD with the Programming Console.
Operation
1,2,3...
1. Set CC00 to the output word.
Output word Input word
? ?
%&
Binary
2. A000, which means positive, or A00F, which means negative, will appear
under the input word display according to the present scaled conversion
data.
C
C
C
CHG
SHIFT
C
2
SHIFT
2
A
A
0
0
? ?
++ )
WRITE
Signed
data
3. The present scaled conversion data will appear in approximately 0.5 seconds.
? ?
++
Numeric
value
213
Section 6-5
Monitor Output
4. A000 or A00F will appear according to the present scaled conversion data
in approximately 0.5 seconds.
? ?
++ )
Signed
data
5. While CC00 is set to the output word, the A000 or A00F and the present
scaled conversion data will be repeatedly displayed alternately at approximately 0.5-s intervals.
6. Set 0000 to the output word again to cancel reading the present scaled
conversion data in binary.
A
CHG
6-5
A
0
A
0
A
0
0
WRITE
? ?
%&
Monitor Output
The CQM1-LSE02 has a monitor output function.
The CQM1-LSE02 can be in scaled conversion data monitor mode or set data
D/A output mode, either of which can be selected with the operation mode A
set command.
The CQM1-LSE02 in scaled conversion data monitor mode does not require
special operation settings. Refer to the following to operate the CQM1-LSE02
in set data D/A output mode.
In this mode, the monitor output terminal of the CQM1-LSE02 will have voltage output corresponding to the scaled conversion data which is written in the
output word allocated to the Unit. Therefore, the ladder program enables the
CQM1-LSE02 to output an analog input signal as a desired voltage value.
Refer to the following table to set signed binary data to use the monitor output
function.
Set output binary data
2710 (10000) min.
9.999
Output voltage (V)
270F (9999)
0000
9.999
0000
D8F1 (–9999)
D8F0 (–10000) max.
–9.999
–9.999
There is no setting range restriction except for the following cases.
If the signed binary data of the CQM1-LSE02 output word is the same as or
less than D8F0 (–10000), –9.999 V will be output from the monitor output terminal. If the signed binary data of the CQM1-LSE02 output word is the same
as or larger than 2710 (10000), 9.999 V will be output from the monitor output
terminal.
Note When obtaining the value to be set to the output word through calculation
using the ladder program, be careful not to use the computed result of “C000
to CFFF.” Even when the Unit is used in the set data D/A output mode, if
“C000 to CFFF” is set to the output word, it is treated as a command.
In this mode, analog input is converted into digital data and then converted
into analog output. Therefore, the obtained analog output is not highly precise.
214
SECTION 7
Commands
This section provides details on the commands and responses of the Linear Sensor Interface Unit.
7-1
Command Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
7-2
List of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
7-3
Commands and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
7-3-1
Operation Mode A Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
7-3-2
Operation Mode A Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
7-3-3
Operation Mode B Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
7-3-4
Operation Mode B Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
7-3-5
Scaling Value Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
7-3-6
Scaling Value Teach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
7-3-7
Scaling Value Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
7-3-8
Set Value Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
7-3-9
Set Value Teach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
7-3-10 Set Value Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
7-3-11 Hysteresis Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226
7-3-12 Hysteresis Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226
7-3-13 Present Value Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
215
Section 7-1
Command Usage
7-1
Command Usage
There are four types of commands.
The command codes can be set to output word. If no command is used, set
0000 to the output word.
When a command is executed, the input word will have a response. If no command is executed, the present scaled conversion data or comparison result
will be stored in the input word.
Note Some commands cannot be used depending on the contents of settings in the
operation mode A or B.
Teach Commands
Scaling Value Teach
Set Value Teach
Command
Output word
Command code
(1)
Input word
(2)
(3)
Command code
Response
1,2,3...
1. Set the command code to the output word. The Unit will check the command code. If the command code is correct, the same command code will
be set to the input word as the response for the command. If the command
code is incorrect, an error code will be set to the input word.
2. After confirming that the response sent back to the input word is correct,
set 0000 to the output word.
3. The scaled conversion data or comparison result will stored in the input
word.
Read Commands
Operation Mode A Read
Operation Mode B Read
Hysteresis Read
Command
Output word
Command code
(1)
Input word
(2)
(3)
Set value
Response
1,2,3...
1. Set the command code to the output word. The Unit will check the command code. If the command code is correct, a set value will be set to the
input word corresponding to the command as the response for the command. If the command code is incorrect, an error code will be set to the
input word.
2. After confirming that the response sent back to the input word is correct,
set 0000 to the output word.
216
Section 7-1
Command Usage
3. The scaled conversion data or comparison result will stored in the input
word.
Set Commands
Operation Mode A Set
Operation Mode B Set
Scaling Value Set
Set Value Set
Hysteresis Set
Command
Output word
Command code
(1)
Input word
Parameter
(3)
(2)
(5)
(4)
Command code
Parameter
Response
1,2,3...
1. Set the command code to the output word. The Unit will check the command code. If the command code is correct, the same command code will
be set to the input word as the response for the command. If the command
code is incorrect, an error code will be set to the input word.
2. After confirming that the response sent back to the input word is correct,
set a parameter to the output word.
3. The Unit will check the parameter. If the parameter is correct, the parameter will be set to the input word as the response for the parameter. If the
parameter is incorrect, an error code will be set to the input word.
4. After confirming that the response sent back to the input word is correct,
set 0000 to the output word. The scaled conversion data or comparison result will stored in the input word.
Signed Set Value Read
Commands
Scaling Value Read
Set Value Read
Hysteresis Read
Command
Output word
Command code
(1)
Input word
(2)
Sign of
set value
(3)
(2)
Set value
Sign of
set value
Set value
Response
1,2,3...
1. Set the command code to the output word. The Unit will check the command code. If the command code is correct, the sign for a set value will be
set to the input word corresponding to the command as the response for
the command. If the command code is incorrect, an error code will be set
to the input word.
The set value will be set to the input word approximately 0.5 s after the sign
is set to the input word. The sign and set value will be set to the input word
alternately at approximately 0.5-s intervals.
217
Section 7-2
List of Commands
2. After confirming that the sign and the set value that the input word is set to
is correct, set 0000 to the output word.
3. The scaled conversion data or comparison result will stored in the input
word.
Note The Linear Sensor Interface Unit acknowledges the start or end of a command through a change in the output word value. When “0000” is set to the
parameter by the setting command, for example, even if “0000” is set at the
end of the command, the command doesn’t end because there is no change
in the output word value, not allowing scaled conversion data or comparison
result to be set in the input word. To end the command, set a value other than
the one set to the parameter. However, that the value will be reflected on the
monitor output if the Unit is used in the set data D/A output mode. Therefore,
when using the Unit in the set data D/A output mode, be sure to select a value
which will not affect peripheral devices.
7-2
List of Commands
The following commands can be used to set the initial parameters through the
Programming Console.
Command
Command
code
Meaning
Reference
page
Operation mode A set
Operation mode A read
C000
C100
Used to set operation mode A.
Used to read the settings of operation mode A.
218
219
Operation mode B set
Operation mode B read
C200
C300
Used to set operation mode B.
Used to read the settings of operation mode B.
220
221
Scaling value set
Scaling value teach
C4**
C5*0
Used to set a scaling value.
Used to execute scaling value teaching.
222
223
Scaling value read
Set value set
C6*0
C7**
Used to read a scaling value.
Used to set a set value.
223
224
Set value teach
Set value read
C8*0
C9*0
Used to execute the set value teaching.
Used to read a set value.
225
225
Hysteresis set
Hysteresis read
CA00
CB00
Used to set hysteresis.
Used to read the hysteresis.
226
226
Present value read
CC00
Used to read the present scaled conversion data.
227
7-3
7-3-1
Commands and Responses
Operation Mode A Set
This command is used to set the following operation mode data.
• Data input
• Timing hold
• Input type
• Monitor output
The above items will be stored in the nonvolatile memory and will not be lost
after the Unit is turned OFF.
218
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
Command
Command Code
Parameter
Monitor output
0: Unchanged
1: Scaled conversion data monitor mode (factory-set)
2: Set data D/A output monitor mode
Input type
0: Unchanged
1: ±9.999 V (factory-set)
2: ±5 V
3: 1 to 5 V
4: 4 to 20 mA
Timing hold
0: Unchanged
1: Normal (factory-set)
2: Sampling hold
3: Maximum hold
4: Minimum hold
5: Peak-to-peak hold
Data input
0: Unchanged
1: Measurement mode (factory-set)
2: Comparison mode
Response
If the correct command code or parameter is set to the output word, the same
command code or parameter will be set to the input word.
If the wrong command code or parameter is set to the output word, one of the
following error codes will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
E001: This error code will be set to the input word if the parameter is not
within the range covered by the Unit.
7-3-2
Operation Mode A Read
This command is used to read the data that has been input in operation mode
A.
Command
Command Code
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
219
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
Response
If the correct command code is set to the output word, the command code or
parameter is set to the input word as a response.
Monitor output
1: Scaled conversion data monitor mode (factory-set)
2: Set data D/A output monitor mode
Input type
0: Unchanged
1: ±9.999 V
2: ±5 V
3: 1 to 5 V
4: 4 to 20 mA
Timing hold
0: Unchanged
1: Normal
2: Sampling hold
3: Maximum hold
4: Minimum hold
5: Peak-to-peak hold
Data input
0: Unchanged
1: Measurement mode
2: Comparison mode
If the wrong command code is set to the output word, the following error code
will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
7-3-3
Operation Mode B Set
This command is used to set the following.
• Input sampling speed
• Number of mean value processings
• Zero shift value storage area
The above items will be stored in the nonvolatile memory and will not be lost
after the Unit is turned OFF.
Command
Command Code
220
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
Parameter
Zero shift value storage area
0: Unchanged
1: RAM (factory-set)
2: Nonvolatile memory
Number of mean value processings
0: Unchanged
1: 1
2: 2
3: 4 (factory-set)
4: 8
5: 16
Input sampling speed
0: Unchanged
1: Fast
2: Slow (factory-set)
Response
If the correct command code or parameter is set to the output word, the command code or parameter is set to the input word as a response.
If the wrong command code or parameter is set to the output word, one of the
following error codes will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
E001: This error code will be set to the input word if the parameter is not
within the range covered by the Unit.
7-3-4
Operation Mode B Read
This command is used to read the data that has been input in operation mode
B.
Command
Command Code
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
221
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
Response
If the correct command code is set to the output word, the command code or
parameter is set to the input word as a response.
Zero shift value storage area
1: RAM
2: Nonvolatile memory
Number of mean value processings
1: 1
2: 2
3: 4
4: 8
5: 16
Input sampling speed
1: Fast
2: Slow
If the wrong command code is set to the output word, the following error code
will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
7-3-5
Scaling Value Set
This command is used to set the X1, X2, Y1, or Y2 scaling value.
If the input type data is changed, the scaling value will be set to the factory-set
scaling value.
The set data will be stored in the nonvolatile memory and will not be lost after
the Unit is turned OFF.
Command
Command Code
Sign
0: Positive
F: Negative
Scaling value
0: X1
1: X2
2: Y1
3: Y2
Parameter
Response
Value
Range: 0 to 9999
Factory-set values:
X1 = 0, X2 = 1000,
Y1 = 0, and Y2 = 1000
If the wrong command code is set to the output word, the following error code
will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
222
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
E001: This error code will be set to the input word if the parameter is not
within the range covered by the Unit.
7-3-6
Scaling Value Teach
This command can be used only when the timing hold in operation mode A is
set to normal.
This command is used to execute scaling value teaching. When scaling value
teaching is executed, the present input value can be used as the X1 or X2
scaling value.
Command
Command Code
Teaching scaling value
0: X1
1: X2
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
Response
If the wrong command code is set to the output word, the following error code
will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
E002: Teaching command execution error
E003: This error code will be set to the input word if the mode designation for
this command is not correct.
7-3-7
Scaling Value Read
This command is used to read a scaling value.
Command
Command Code
Scaling value
0: X1
1: X2
2: Y1
3: Y2
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
223
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
Response
If the output word is set to the correct command code, the sign of the scaling
value and the scaling value will be set to the input word alternately in the following format.
Sign
0: Positive
F: Negative
Value
Range: 0 to 9999
Factory-set values:
X1 = 0, X2 = 1000,
Y1 = 0, and Y2 = 1000
If the wrong command code is set to the output word, the following error code
will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
7-3-8
Set Value Set
This command is used to set the HH, H, L, or LL set value.
The set value will be stored in the nonvolatile memory and will not be lost after
the Unit is turned OFF.
Command
Command Code
Sign
0: Positive (Factory-set HH and H set values)
F: Negative (Factory-set LL and L set values)
Set value
0: LL
1: L
2: H
3: HH
Parameter
Value
Range: 0 to 9999
Factory-set value: 9999
Response
If the correct command code or parameter is set to the output word, the same
command code or parameter will be set to the input word.
If the wrong command code or parameter is set to the output word, one of the
following error codes will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
E001: This error code will be set to the input word if the parameter is not
within the range covered by the Unit.
224
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
7-3-9
Set Value Teach
This command can be used only when the timing hold in operation mode A is
set to normal.
This command is used to execute set value teaching. When set value teaching is executed, the present input value can be used as the HH, H, L or LL set
value.
Command
Command Code
Teaching set value
0: LL
1: L
2: H
3: HH
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
Response
If the wrong command code is set to the output word, the following error code
will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
E002: Teaching command execution error
E003: This error code will be set to the input word if the mode designation for
this command is not correct.
7-3-10 Set Value Read
This command is used to read a set value.
Command
Command Code
Set value
0: LL
1: L
2: H
3: HH
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
Response
If the output word is set to the correct command code, the sign of the set value
and the set value will be set to the input word alternately in the following format.
Sign
0: Positive
F: Negative
Value
Range: 0 to 9999
225
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
If the output word is set to the wrong command code, the following error
codes will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
7-3-11 Hysteresis Set
This command is used to set the hysteresis.
If the input type data is changed, the hysteresis will be reset to its factory-set
value.
The set data will be stored in the nonvolatile memory and will not be lost after
the Unit is turned OFF.
Command
Command Code
Parameter
Range: 0001 to 0999
Factory-set value: 0001
Response
If the correct command code or parameter is set to the output word, the same
command code or parameter will be set to the input word.
If the wrong command code or parameter is set to the output word, one of the
following error codes will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
E001: This error code will be set to the input word if the parameter is not
within the range covered by the Unit.
7-3-12 Hysteresis Read
This command is used to read the hysteresis.
Command
Command Code
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
Response
If the correct command code or parameter is set to the output word, the same
command code or parameter will be set to the input word.
Range: 0001 to 0999
Default value: 0001
If the wrong command code or parameter is set to the output word, one of the
following error codes will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
226
Section 7-3
Commands and Responses
7-3-13 Present Value Read
This command can be used only when the timing hold in operation mode A is
set to normal.
This command is used to read the present measured value after scaling.
Command
Command Code
Parameter
Parameters are not used with this command.
Response
If the correct command code or parameter is set to the output word, the
present conversion data will be set to the input word.
Sign
0: Positive
F: Negative
Value
Range: 0 to 9999
If the wrong command code or parameter is set to the output word, one of the
following error codes will be set to the input word.
E000: This error code will be set to the input word if a nonexisting command
code is used.
E003: This error code will be set to the input word if the mode designation for
this command is not correct.
227
Appendix A
Specifications
Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the CQM1-LSE01/LSE02 conform to those of SYSMAC CQM1H/CQM1-series
PCs.
Performance Specifications
Item
Input
CQM1-LSE01
CQM1-LSE02
No. of analog input points 1
Input range Voltage input 1 to 5 V, –9.999 to 9.999 V, –5 to 5 V
Input
impedance
Linearity
PC output code
Current input 4 to 20 mA
Voltage input 1 MΩ min.
Current input 10 Ω
±0.1% FS ±1 digit max. with input sampling speed set to slow
±0.5% FS ±1 digit max. with input sampling speed set to fast
Signed binary (–9999 to 9999)
Sampling time
0.3 ms with input sampling speed set to fast and 0.6 ms with input sampling
speed set to slow
Sampling period
Operation processing time
1 ms with input sampling speed set to fast and 2 ms with input sampling speed
set to slow
5 ms
External control input
No. of occupied words
TIMING/GATE, ZERO, ZERO RESET, RESET
1 input word and 1 output word
MoniVoltage output
tor out- Output linearity
put
Output resolution
Output refresh period
-----
–9.999 V to 9.999 V
±0.1% FS
-----
1/8192
0.5 s
Output response time
Permissible load resistance
Insulation method
-----
0.5 s
10 kΩ min.
Dielectric strength
Photocoupler insulation between input terminals and PC signals and between
input terminals and output terminals.
500 VAC for 1 minute between input terminals and output terminals
1,000 VAC for 1 minute between I/O terminals and FG
Current consumption
Dimensions
380 mA max. at 5 VDC
32 x 110 x 107 (W x H x D) mm
Weight
230 g max.
450 mA max. at 5 VDC
229
Appendix A
Specifications
External Control Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Input voltage
24 VDC
Input impedance
TIMING/GATE:
2 kΩ
Other control output: 2.2 kΩ
Input current
TIMING/GATE:
9.2 mA TYP.
Other control output: 10 mA TYP. (24 VDC)
ON voltage
TIMING/GATE:
16.3 VDC min.
Other control output: 17.1 VDC min.
OFF voltage
TIMING/GATE:
Other control output:
TIMING/GATE:
Other control output:
ON/OFF response time
(see note)
Circuit configuration
24 VDC
+10%
/–15%
3.8 VDC max.
3.6 VDC max.
50 µs TYP.
4 ms TYP.
820 Ω
(1.2 kΩ)
Internal
circuitry
2.2 Ω (2 kΩ)
Figures in parentheses are values for
TIMING input and GATE input.
Note The ON/OFF response time is the time required for the Unit’s CPU to detect input turned ON or OFF.
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
230
Appendix B
Block Diagram
Indicator
circuit
Voltage/Current input
Control input power
supply (24 VDC)
Input
circuit
Analog-Digital conversion
circuit
Micro
computer
Bus
interface
circuit
CQM1H/CQM1
internal bus
Control input circuit
Control input
Monitor output
Digital-analog output
circuit
Nonvolatile
memory
Internal circuit
Input and analog-digital
conversion circuits
Digital-Analog output circuit
Voltage stabilizing circuit
Voltage stabilizing circuit
Power
supply
circuit
Internal power
supply
231
Appendix C
Data Processing Timing
Sampling
The Unit processes input data in the following two blocks.
• A: Input sampling time = Sampling period x No. of mean value processings
• B: Operation process and data set to the data input word
Data processing
Next data processing
The Unit has the following two sampling periods.
• Fast:
1 ms (with 0.3-ms sampling time)
• Slow:
2 ms (with 0.6-ms sampling time)
The necessity of the sampling hold process depends on the timing hold.
Sampling Example
The following are typical sampling timing examples.
Example 1
Timing Hold:
Normal
No. of Mean Value Processings: 1
Input Sampling Speed:
Fast
Example 2
Timing Hold:
Sampling hold
No. of Mean Value Processings: 4
Input Sampling Speed:
Fast
Waiting for next
timing input
0.05 ms min.
Timing input
233
Appendix C
Data Processing Timing
Example 3
Timing Hold:
Maximum hold
No. of Mean Value Processings: 2
Input Sampling Speed:
Fast
B'
B'
Maximum hold processing
This value is invalid.
Waiting for next
timing input
Timing input
Data Read
When a ladder program is used to automatically read the data to be input, the data is sampled in synchronization with timing input. Therefore, the CPU used with the Unit must read the data in synchronization with the
sampling timing.
Timing Input Connected in Parallel
The timing signal can connect with the TIMING/GATE terminal and the input word of the CPU in parallel as
shown in the following illustration to synchronize the operation of the CPU and the sampling timing of the Unit.
CQM1-LSE01/LSE02
CPU
Timing signal
The Unit requires time to process input and to set data to its input word corresponding to the input. The actual
data reading timing must be later than the moment timing input to the Unit is ON. The input process time varies
with the timing hold currently selected. The following is the input process time with its timing hold set to sampling hold.
Input sampling
Operation process and data set
Timing input
Time required until the data is set.
234
Appendix C
Data Processing Timing
Using Reset Input
Connect a bit of the output word to the Unit’s reset input terminal. If reset input is ON, the input word will be set
to BBBB (i.e., the factory-set setting of the input word). Take the following steps to set the input word to BBBB.
1,2,3...
1. Turn reset input ON.
2. When BBBB is set to the input word, turn reset input OFF.
3. If BBBB is set to data other than the input word, let the Unit read the data.
4. Repeat the above steps.
Start
Turn reset input
ON
BBBB set to input
word
N
Y
Turn reset input
OFF
BBBB set to input
word
Y
N
Read input word
data
Timing Input and Reset Input
When the timing hold is not set to normal or sampling hold, timing input to the Unit will work as gate input, in
which case reset input to the Unit will work as follows:
1,2,3...
1. If timing input is turned OFF while reset input is ON, the present scaled conversion data will not
be effective and BBBB will be read as the present scaled conversion data.
2. The Unit will sample and process input from the moment reset input is turned OFF to the moment
timing input is turned OFF, in which case, while the reset input in ON, BBBB will be read as the
present scaled conversion data.
3. The Unit will sample and process input from the moment reset input is turned OFF to the moment
timing input is OFF, in which case, input from the moment the timing input is turned ON to the moment reset input is turned ON will not be effective.
4. The Unit will ignore timing input while reset input is ON.
Timing input
Reset input
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
235
Appendix D
Troubleshooting
Internal Error
ERR indicator is lit.
Word status
BEEE
B010
B011
Possible cause and remedy
CPU error.
Turn the power OFF and then ON again, once. If the ERR indicator is still lit, the Unit
needs repairs.
RAM error (calibration data error).
Turn the power OFF and then ON again, once. If the ERR indicator is still lit, the Unit
needs repairs.
Set value data error.
Turn the power OFF and then ON again, once, or reset all the initial values of the Unit
again and execute the zero reset.
Sensor Error
BROKEN-WIRE indicator is lit.
Word status
Possible cause and remedy
B001 (measurement mode)
Check if the wires of the sensor connected to the Unit are broken, short circuited, or incorBit 15 = 1 (comparison mode) rectly connected to the Unit.
Overflow
Word status
Possible cause and remedy
B000 (measurement mode)
Set all the set values within the permissible ranges of the Unit.
Bit 14 = 1 (comparison mode)
Command Error
Word status
Possible cause and remedy
E000
E001
A nonexisting command code was used. Check the command description.
Parameter setting range error. Set the parameter correctly and execute the command.
E002
Teach command execution error.
Cancel the following conditions and execute the teach command again.
Reset input
Sensor error
Overflow
E003
Mode designation error.
The command C500, C800, or CC00 can be set to the output word only when the timing
hold mode is set to normal. Set the timing hold mode to normal in the operation mode A
and execute the required command again.
237
PART VIII
Temperature Control Units
CQM1-TC001
CQM1-TC002
CQM1-TC101
CQM1-TC102
CQM1-TC201
CQM1-TC202
CQM1-TC301
CQM1-TC302
CQM1-TC203
CQM1-TC204
CQM1-TC303
CQM1-TC304
239
SECTION 1
Temperature Control Unit Model Numbers
This section lists the Temperature Control Unit model numbers and the basic specifications for each Unit.
241
Temperature Control Unit Model Numbers
Section 1
Temperature Control Units are classified into models according to the number
of input loops, the type of output, and other functions, as listed in the following
diagram.
CQM1-TC@@@
Two input loops, basic functions (Word allocations: 2 input and 2 output words)
001: Thermocouple input (K, J),
NPN output
002: Thermocouple input (K, J),
PNP output
Refer to pages
272 to 287.
101: Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100, JPt100),
NPN output
102: Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100, JPt100)
PNP output
Four input loops, advanced functions (Word allocations: 1 input and 1 output word)
201: Thermocouple input (K, J, T, L, R, S, B),
NPN output
202: Thermocouple input (K, J, T, L, R, S, B),
PNP output
301: Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100, JPt100),
NPN output
302: Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100, JPt100)
PNP output
Two input loops, heater burnout alarm (Word allocations: 1 input and 1 output word)
203: Thermocouple input (K, J, T, L, R, S, B),
NPN output
204: Thermocouple input (K, J, T, L, R, S, B),
PNP output
303: Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100, JPt100),
NPN output
304: Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt100, JPt100)
PNP output
242
Refer to pages
244 to 270.
SECTION 2
CQM1-TC20@/TC30@ Temperature Control Units
This section describes the features and operation of the CQM1-TC20@/TC30@ Temperature Control Units.
2-1
Features and Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
2-1-1
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
2-1-2
Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
2-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
2-3
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
2-4
Terminology and Function Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
2-5
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
2-6
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
2-6-1
Communications Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
2-6-2
2-7
Using Operation Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
IOTC(––). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
2-7-1
Sending I/O Allocation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
2-7-2
Sending Operation Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
2-8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
269
2-9
Command Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
243
Section 2-1
Features and Word Allocations
2-1
Features and Word Allocations
2-1-1
Features
• The PID with advanced feed-forward circuitry (2 degrees of freedom) of
the CQM1-TC20@/TC30@ assures stable temperature control. The Units
can also be set to ON/OFF control.
• Temperature Control Units are available for either 4-loop temperature control or 2-loop temperature control, and Units with 2-loop temperature control provide a heater burnout alarm. You can also select between
thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers as the input sensors.
Temperature Control Units
Inputs
4 loops
2 loops with heater
burnout alarm
Output type
NPN outputs
PNP outputs
Thermocouples
Platinum resistance
thermometers
Thermocouples
CQM1-TC201
CQM1-TC301
CQM1-TC202
CQM1-TC302
CQM1-TC203
CQM1-TC204
Platinum resistance
thermometers
CQM1-TC303
CQM1-TC304
Temperature Ranges
Thermocouples (See note.)
K (CA)
K (CA)
J (IC)
J (IC)
T (CC)
L
Platinum resistance
thermometers
L
R
S
1700
1800
B
Pt100
JPt100
650.0
650.0
Pt100
JPt100
250.0
250.0
−20.0
−20.0
---
1800
1700
1300
1300
850
850
800
500.0
600
400.0
400.0
400.0
400
300
200
Do not set.
Termperature range (degrees C)
1600
100
100
0
0.0
0.0
−100
0.0
−200
0
−200.0
−200
Code
No.
Min.
unit
0
−100
−100
0
1
2
3
4
1°C
0.1°C
1°C
0.1°C 0.1°C
−200.0
5
6
7
1°C
0.1°C 1°C
8
9
0
0.1°C
−200.0
1
2
0.01°C
3
4 to
9
---
Note K (CA) = Chromel/alumel, J (IC) = Iron/constantan, T (CC) = Copper/constantan, L = Iron/constantan, R = Platinum/platinum rhodium 13%, S = Platinum/
platinum rhodium 10%, B = Platinum rhodium 30%/platinum rhodium 6%
2-1-2
Word Allocations
• One word each is allocated to the Temperature Control Unit for inputs and
outputs.
• Commands are used to set and read data.
244
Section 2-2
Specifications
• The IOTC(––) instruction can be used to simplify programming when
using CX-Programmer version 2.0 or higher and a CQM1H CPU Unit with
a lot number of 0160 or later.
2-2
Specifications
General Specifications
The general specifications of the CQM1-TC20@/TC30@ conform to those of
the CQM1H/CQM1 Series.
Performance Specifications
Item
Units for thermocouples
(CQM1-TC20@)
K, J, T, L, R, S, B
Specification
Units for platinum resistance
thermometers (CQM1-TC30@)
Pt100, JPt100
Sensor type (See previous page for
temperature ranges.)
Number of control loops
2 loops or 4 loops (2-loop model has heater burnout alarm)
Control output
NPN or PNP output with short-circuit protection
Power supply voltage: 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Hysteresis adjustment
Maximum switching capacity: 100 mA per output
Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Residual voltage: 0.8 V max.
ON/OFF control, advanced PID control (2 degrees of freedom), or manual operation
°C Ranges
0.1 °C Ranges
(Process value ±0.3% or ±1 °C, which- (Process value ±0.3% or ±0.8 °C,
ever is larger) ±1 digit max.
whichever is larger) ±1 digit max.
°F Ranges
0.1 °F Ranges
(Process value ±0.3% or ±2 °F, which- (Process value ±0.3% or ±1.6 °F,
ever is larger) ±1 digit max. (See note whichever is larger) ±1 digit max. (See
1.)
note 1.)
The accuracy is given when the cold
0.01 °C Ranges
junction compensator on the terminal
(Process value ±0.3% or ±0.5 °C,
block is used. Always use the cold junc- whichever is larger) ±1 digit max.
tion compensator on the terminal block.
(See note 2.)
0.1 to 999.9 °C/°F (0.1°C/°F unit)
Proportional band
Derivative time
0.1 to 999.9 °C/°F (0.1°C/°F unit)
0 to 3,999 s (1 s unit)
Integral time
Manual manipulated variable
0 to 3,999 s (1 s unit)
0.0 to 100.0% (0.1% unit)
Control period
Input shift value
1 to 99 s (1 s unit)
–99.9 to 999.9 °C/°F (0.1°C/°F unit)
Sampling period
Output refresh period
0.5 s
0.5 s
Current consumption
Weight
190 mA max. at 5 VDC
200 g max.
Dimensions
32 x 110 x 107 mm (W x H x D)
Control mode
Setting and display accuracy
Note
0.1 °C Ranges
–99.9 to 999.9 °C/°F (0.1°C/°F unit)
0.01 °C Ranges
–9.99 to 99.99 °C/°F (0.01°C/°F unit)
1. The accuracy of K and J thermocouples at or below –100 °C is ±2 °C ±1
digit max., and the accuracy of R and S thermocouples at or below 200 °C
245
Section 2-2
Specifications
is ±3 °C ±1 digit max. The accuracy of B thermocouples at or below 400 °C
is not specified.
2. When returning a Unit for repairs, always include the terminal block (or the
cold junction compensator).
Heater Burnout Alarm (CQM1-TC@03/TC@04)
Note
Item
Maximum heater current
Specification
50 A, single-phase AC
Input current monitoring accuracy
Heater burnout alarm setting
±5 % FS ±1 digit
0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A unit) (See note 1.)
Minimum ON time for detection
200 ms (See note 2.)
1. Heater burnout detection will be disabled if the alarm is set to 0.0 A. The
heater burnout alarm output will turn ON if the alarm is set to 50.0 A.
2. If the control output is ON for less than 200 ms, heater burnout will not be
detected and the heater current will not be measured.
Current Detector (CT) Ratings
Item
E54-CT1
Continuous maximum
heater current
Range for accurate
measurement
Withstand voltage
50 A
Shock resistance
Hole diameter
50 Hz (Approx. 10 G)
5.8 mm
Weight
Accessories
Approx. 11.5 g
None
0 to 30 A
E54-CT3
0 to 50 A
1,000 VAC
12.0 mm
Approx. 50 g
Contactors: 2
Plugs: 2
Dimensions:
CQM1-TC20@/TC30@
Unit: mm
246
Section 2-2
Specifications
Current Detector (Sold Separately)
21
E54-CT1
2.8
15
5.8 dia.
7.5
25
10.5 3
10
30
Two, 3.5 dia. holes
40
30
E54-CT3
2.36 dia.
12 dia.
9
40
30
40
Two, M3 (depth: 4)
Unit: mm
247
Section 2-3
Nomenclature
2-3
Nomenclature
Front View
Ready indicator (green, lit when the Unit is
recognized as the Temperature Control Unit)
Four-loop Models
OUT1 to OUT4 indicators (orange, lit when
control output is ON)
Two-loop Models
OUT1 and OUT2 indicators (orange, lit when
control output is ON)
HB1 and HB2 indicators (red, lit when a
heater burnout has been detected)
Terminal screws: M3
Side View
Function DIP switch (SW1)
ON
Slide lock OFF
Input type DIP switch (SW2)
ON
OFF
Cover
Terminals
Slide lock
248
Loops
1 and 3
Loops
2 and 4
Section 2-3
Nomenclature
Switch Settings
Set all switches before mounting the Unit. Factory settings are shown in bold
text in the following table.
Pin
Function DIP Switch (SW1)
ON
OFF
Note
Item
Settings
1
Control method
ON
OFF
Advanced PID
ON/OFF
2
Control operation for loops 1 and ON
3
OFF
Normal (cooling control)
Reverse (heating control)
3
Control operation for loops 2 and ON
4
OFF
Normal (cooling control)
Reverse (heating control)
4
Temperature unit
ON
OFF
°F (See note 1.)
°C
5
Data type
ON
OFF
4-digit BCD
16-bit binary (4-digit Hex)
6
Leave this switch set to OFF.
1. Do not use this setting for platinum resistance thermometers; 0.01°F ranges are not supported.
2. The following ranges must be used when 4-digit BCD is specified:
0.1°C/°F ranges: –99.9 (F999) to 999.9 (9999)
0.01°C/°F ranges: –9.99 (F999) to 99.99 (9999)
Input Type DIP Switch (SW2)
ON
OFF
Pins 5 to 8: Thermocouple type and range setting for loops 2 and 4
Pins 1 to 4: Thermocouple type and range setting for loops 1 and 3
Code
No.
Input type
Units for thermocouples
(CQM1-TC20@)
Units for platinum resistance
thermometers (CQM1-TC30@)
0
K, –200 to 1,300 °C
Pt100, –200.0 to 650.0 °C
1
K, 0.0 to 500.0 °C
JPt100, –200.0 to 650.0 °C
2
J, –100 to 850 °C
Pt100, –20.00 to 250.00 °C
3
J, 0.0 to 400.0 °C
JPt100, –20.00 to 250.00 °C
4
T, –200.0 to 400.0 °C
Do not set.
5
L, –100 to 850 °C
Do not set.
6
L, 0.0 to 400.0 °C
Do not set.
7
R, 0 to 1,700 °C
Do not set.
8
S, 0 to 1,700 °C
Do not set.
9
B, 100 to 1,800 °C
Do not set.
Note
Setting
Loops 1 and 3
1
2
3
4
❍
●
❍
●
❍
●
❍
●
❍
●
❍
❍
●
●
❍
❍
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
●
●
Loops 2 and 4
5
6
7
8
❍
●
❍
●
❍
●
❍
●
❍
●
❍
❍
●
●
❍
❍
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
●
●
1. ●: ON, ❍: OFF
2. All pins are turned OFF at the factory.
3. Do not use any settings that are not specified above.
249
Section 2-3
Nomenclature
Temperature Ranges
Units for Thermocouples
Code
No.
Input
type
0
K
1
K
2
J
3
J
4
T
5
L
6
The setting ranges are shown in the following table. Indication ranges are the
setting range ±20°C/°F. (See note 1.)
°C
Binary
(4-digit Hex)
°F
BCD
FF38 to FFFF to 0514
(–200 to –1 to 1300)
0000 to 1388
(0.0 to 500.0)
FF9C to FFFF to 0352
(–100 to –1 to 850)
0000 to 0FA0
(0.0 to 400.0)
F200 to 1300
(–200 to 1300)
0000 to 5000
(0.0 to 500.0)
F100 to 0850
(–100 to 850)
0000 to 4000
(0.0 to 400.0)
Binary
(4-digit Hex)
BCD
FED4 to FFFF to 08FC
(–300 to –1 to 2300)
0000 to 2328
(0.0 to 900.0)
FF9C to FFFF to 05DC
(–100 to –1 to 1500)
0000 to 1D4C
(0.0 to 750.0)
F300 to 2300
(–300 to 2300)
0000 to 9000
(0.0 to 900.0)
F100 to 1500
(–100 to 1500)
0000 to 7500
(0.0 to 750.0)
F830 to FFFF to 0FA0
F999 to 4000 (See
(–200.0 to –0.1 to 400.0) note 2.)
(–99.9 to 400.0)
FF9C to FFFF to 0352
F100 to 0850
(–100 to –1 to 850)
(–100 to 850)
F448 to FFFF to 1B53
F999 to 7000 (See
(–300.0 to –0.1 to 700.0) note 2.)
(–99.9 to 700.0)
FF9C to FFFF to 05DC
F100 to 1500
(–100 to –1 to 1500)
(–100 to 1500)
L
0000 to 0FA0
(0.0 to 400.0)
0000 to 4000
(0.0 to 400.0)
0000 to 1D4C
(0.0 to 750.0)
0000 to 7500
(0.0 to 750.0)
7
R
0000 to 06A4
(0 to 1700)
0000 to 1700
(0 to 1700)
0000 to 0BB8
(0 to 3000)
0000 to 3000
(0 to 3000)
8
S
9
B (See
note 3.)
0000 to 06A4
(0 to 1700)
0064 to 0708
(100 to 1800)
0000 to 1700
(0 to 1700)
0100 to 1800
(100 to 1800)
0000 to 0BB8
(0 to 3000)
012C to 0C80
(300 to 3200)
0000 to 3000
(0 to 3000)
0300 to 3200
(300 to 3200)
Units for Platinum
Resistance Thermometers
Code
No.
Input
type
The setting ranges are shown in the following table. Indication ranges are the
setting range ±20 °C/°F. (See note 1.)
°C
°F
Binary
(4-digit Hex)
F830 to FFFF to 1964
(–200.0 to –0.1 to
650.0)
F830 to FFFF to 1964
(–200.0 to –0.1 to
650.0)
F830 to FFFF to 61A8
(–20.00 to –0.01 to
250.00)
Binary
BCD
(4-digit Hex)
F999 to 6500 (See note F448 to FFFF to 2EE0 F999 to 9999 (See note
2.)
(–300.0 to –1 to 1200.0) 2.)
(–99.9 to 650.0)
(–99.9 to 999.9)
F999 to 6500 (See note F448 to FFFF to 2EE0 F999 to 9999 (See note
2.)
(–300.0 to –1 to 1200.0) 2.)
(–99.9 to 650.0)
(–99.9 to 999.9)
F999 to 9999 (See note Do not set. (See note 4.)
2.)
(–9.99 to 99.99)
F999 to 9999 (See note
2.)
(–9.99 to 99.99)
0
Pt100
1
JPt100
2
Pt100
3
JPt100
F830 to FFFF to 61A8
(–20.00 to –0.01 to
250.00)
4 to 9
---
Do not set. (See note 4.)
Note
BCD
1. For binary indications, a sensor error (E400) will occur if the specified
range is exceeded. In Auto Mode, the output for the corresponding loop will
turn OFF if this error occurs.
2. For BCD indications, the indicated values will be clamped to the upper or
lower limit between the upper or lower limit of the setting range and the values that will cause a sensor error (E400),
0.1 °C/°F Indications: Lower limit = –99.9, Upper limit = 999.9
0.01 °C Indications: Lower limit = –9.99, Upper limit = 99.99
3. The lower limit of indications for B thermocouples is 0 °C/°F.
250
Section 2-4
Terminology and Function Descriptions
4. Do not use any settings other than those specified above.
5. The set points and input shift values will change as follows if the input type
is changed:
• The set points will be clamped at the upper or lower limit if the setting
range is exceeded.
• The decimal points will be adjusted if the range is changed to another
range with a different number of decimal places.
Example: If pin 1 on SW2 is turned ON, the K thermocouple range will
be changed from –200 to 1,300 °C to 0.0 to 500.0 °C. If a set point was
previously 200 °C, it will be changed to 20.0 °C.
2-4
Terminology and Function Descriptions
Manual Manipulated Variable
The manual manipulated variable can be used only as a time-proportional
ratio. Control is continued based on the final output level when automatic control (ON/OFF or advanced PID) is switched to manual operation. This function
enables the output to be controlled artificially without using RUN or STOP
commands or altering the input status (e.g., for sensor errors). An example of
application is shown below.
Manual manipulated variable changed
Output
0%
Auto
Manual
Changed
Heater Burnout Alarm
Auto
Changed
• The heater burnout alarm output is a latched output. To reset the heater
burnout alarm output, either set the heater burnout alarm set value to 0.0
or turn the power supply to the Unit OFF and then back ON.
• The heater burnout alarm settings are shown in the following table.
Setting
0.0
0.1 to 49.9
50.0
Operation
Heater burnouts will not be detected. The heater burnout alarm output will turn OFF. This setting is used to
reset an alarm.
The detection level for heater burnout alarms.
Heater burnouts will not be detected. The heater burnout alarm output will turn ON regardless of RUN/STOP
status. This setting can be used to check wiring.
• Heater Current
If the heater current reaches 55.0 A or higher, a CT input error will occur
and E500 will be output if the heater current is being monitored.
• The current at which a heater burnout will be detected is calculated as follows:
Set value = (Normal current + current after burnout)/2
• The following condition must be met:
Normal current – current after burnout ≥ 2.5 A
251
Section 2-4
Terminology and Function Descriptions
Measurements will not be stable if the difference is less than 2.5 A. If
the difference is less than 2.5 A, wrap the wire around the CT two or
three times to increase the measured current. The heater current monitor function can be used to measure the currents. Actual values can
vary from calculated values.
Input Shift Value
• An input shift value can be set to offset the indicated value from the actual
measured value. For example, if the input shift value is set to 3.0 °C and
the actual measured temperature is 50 °C, the monitored temperature will
be 53 °C.
• If the input shift value is set too large, a sensor error can occur near the
upper and lower limits of the temperature range even though the measure
temperature is still within range.
Autotuning (AT)
PID calculations using the limit cycle method are performed when autotuning
is executed. Parameters cannot be written for loops that are currently being
autotuned.
Hunting cycle
Amplitude
Calculated
PID control
Set point
AT executed for ON/OFF control
AT completed (amplitude and hunting cycle
measurements completed)
• The limit cycle method causes hunting using ON/OFF control near the set
point to measure the hunting cycle and amplitude and uses the results to
make calculations for PID control.
• Be sure to change the START AT command in the output word after the
START AT command has been sent and received. If the START AT command is left set in the output word, autotuning will be executed again as
soon as it is completed.
252
Section 2-5
Wiring
2-5
Wiring
Wiring
Units for Thermocouples
CQM1-TC201
(4 loops, NPN
outputs)
CQM1-TC202
(4 loops, PNP
outputs)
Loop 1
Loop 1
Loop 2
Loop 2
Cold junction
compensator
Loop 3
Output 1
Output 3
Output 4
Loop 1
Loop 2
CQM1-TC204
(2 loops, heater burnout
alarm PNP outputs)
Loop 1
Loop 2
Cold junction
compensator
Cold junction
compensator
Cold junction
compensator
Loop 3
Loop 4
Loop 4
Output 2
CQM1-TC203
(2 loops, heater burnout
alarm NPN outputs)
Output 1
Output 2
Output 4
Output 2
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
Output 1
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
• Do not touch or remove the cold junction compensator.
• The sensor must be of the type set on the input type DIP switch.
Units for Platinum
Resistance Thermometers
CQM1-TC301
(4 loops, NPN
outputs)
CQM1-TC302
(4 loops, PNP
outputs)
CQM1-TC303
(2 loops, heater burnout
alarm NPN outputs)
CQM1-TC304
(2 loops, heater burnout
alarm PNP outputs)
Loop 1
Loop 1
Loop 1
Loop 1
Loop 4
Output 2
Output 4
Loop 3
Output 1
Output 3
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
Loop 4
Output 2
Output 4
Loop 2
Loop 2
Loop 2
Loop 2
Loop 3
Output 1
Output 1
Output 2
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
+24 VDC
(from external
power supply)
• The +DC terminals for NPN outputs are internally connected.
• The 0V terminals for NPN outputs are internally connected.
Crimp Terminals
Use M3 crimp connectors and tighten terminal screws to a torque of 0.3 to
0.5 N•m
6.2 mm max.
6.2 mm max.
253
Section 2-6
Application
Current Detectors
(E54-CT1/CT3)
Connect to CT input
terminals on the
Temperature Control
Unit (no polarity).
Control output
Heater
Heater wire
AC power
CT
Current Detector
(E54-CT1/CT3)
Output Interface
Output Characteristics
Built-in Short-circuit
Protection Circuit
Maximum switching capability
100 mA, 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Leakage current
0.1 mA max.
Residual voltage
External supply voltage
0.8 V max.
30 mA min., 24 VDC +10%/–15% (excluding load current)
When the short-circuit protection circuit operates, turn OFF the output or the
output power supply, or release the short circuit.
Output Circuits
TC(01/TC(03
TC(02/TC(04
• The +DC terminals for NPN outputs are internally connected.
• The 0V terminals for NPN outputs are internally connected.
• Heater burnout alarm outputs (HB1 and HB2) are latched outputs, i.e.,
they will not reset by themselves.
2-6
Application
The Unit will be in Auto Mode in STOP status when the power supply is turned
ON. An operation control command must be executed to start actual operation. Refer to 2-6-2 Using Operation Control Commands for details on the
commands.
254
Section 2-6
Application
2-6-1
Communications Procedure
The following diagram illustrates the procedures used to set parameters, monitor data, and read data.
Note No commands are set at startup.
60 ms max.
(1)
Power ON
60 ms max.
(2)
(3)
C(((
Output
word
Input FFFF
word
Initialization
0000
(4)
Write data
C(((
Read data
Initialization
completed
1,2,3...
1. Output word: An I/O allocation command (C@@@) is set to specify the loop
and the items to be set and monitored.
2. Input word: The I/O allocation command set in the output word will be set
by the system as a “Command Acknowledged Flag” to indicate that the
command has been acknowledged.
3. Output word: The write data for the I/O allocation command set in 1. is set.
4. Input word: After the data specified in 3. has been set, the data specified
to be monitored in 1. will be set by the system. This also functions as a
“Write Completed Flag” to indicate that the write operation has been completed.
C
Output word
Loop number: 1 to 4
Item To Be Set
Value
Item To Be Monitored
Item to be set
Value
Item to be monitored
0
1
Set point
Proportional band (for advanced PID)
0
1
Set point
Proportional band (for advanced PID)
2
3
Integral time (for advanced PID)
Derivative time (for advanced PID)
2
3
Integral time (for advanced PID)
Derivative time (for advanced PID)
4
5
Hysteresis (for ON/OFF control)
4
Control cycle (for advanced PID or manual control) 5
Hysteresis (for ON/OFF control)
Control cycle (for advanced PID or manual control)
6
7
Input shift value
No item set (See note 2.)
6
7
Input shift value
Process value
8
9
Manual manipulated variable
Do not set.
8
9
Manipulated variable
Status
A
Heater burnout alarm setting (only for models with
heater burnout alarms)
A
Heater burnout alarm setting (only for models with
heater burnout alarms)
B
Do not set.
B
Heater current (only for models with heater burnout
alarms)
255
Section 2-6
Application
Note
1. A setting error will be indicated by outputting EE01 to the input word if any
values other than those listed above are specified. Reset the contents of
the output word if an error occurs.
2. When there is no item to set, set C7@@ into the output word and then use
0000 as the write data.
3. If the write data is set before the response confirming acknowledgement of
the I/O allocation command has been received, the set value will be used
for the previous I/O allocation command. Always confirm that the I/O allocation command has been acknowledged before setting the write data.
Setting and Indication Ranges for Setting and Monitor Items
Decimal values are given in parentheses.
Setting/Monitor item
Set point
Proportional band
Integral time
Derivative time
Hysteresis
Control cycle
Input
shift
value
Binary indications
BCD indications
Range
Default
Depends on input 0000
type. (See
page 250.)
0001 to 270F
0190
(0.1 to 999.9)
(40.0)
Range
Default
Depends on input 0000
type. (See
page 250.)
0001 to 9999
0400
(0.1 to 999.9)
(40.0)
0000 to 0F9F
(0 to 3999)
0000 to 0F9F
(0 to 3999)
0001 to 270F
(0.1 to 999.9)
0001 to 0063
(1 to 99)
00F0
(240)
0028
(40)
0008
(0.8)
0014
(20)
0000 to 3999
(0 to 3999)
0000 to 3999
(0 to 3999)
0001 to 9999
(0.1 to 999.9)
0001 to 0099
(1 to 99)
0240
(240)
0040
(40)
0008
(0.8)
0020
(20)
s
0000
(0.00)
F999 to 9999
(–9.99 to 99.99)
0000
(0.00)
°C
Platinum resisFC19 to 270F
tance thermome- (–9.99 to 99.99)
ters in 0.01°
ranges
Unit
Memory
°C/°F
Written to RAM (transferred to EEPROM via
CEEA command).
Written to EEPROM.
(See note 2.)
Write life: 100,000 writes
(See note 3.)
°C/°F
s
°C/°F
s
Others (See note
4.)
Heater burnout alarm setting (See note 5.)
Manual manipulated variable
Process value
FC19 to 270F
(–99.9 to 999.9)
0000 to 01F4
(0.0 to 50.0)
0000 to 03E8
(0.0 to 100.0)
Depends on input
type.
0000
(0.00)
0000
(0.0)
See note
7.
---
F999 to 9999
(–99.9 to 999.9)
0000 to 0500
(0.0 to 50.0)
0000 to 1000
(0.0 to 100.0)
Depends on input
type.
0000
(0.00)
0000
(0.0)
See note
7.
---
°C/°F
Manipulated variable
(See note 6.)
0000 to 03E8
(0.0 to 100.0)
---
0000 to 1000
(0.0 to 100.0)
---
%
Heater current
0000 to 0226
(0.0 to 55.0)
F500 (55.0 min.)
---
0000 to 0550
(0.0 to 55.0)
E500 (55.0 min.)
---
A
Note
A
%
Stored in RAM
°C/°F
1. A setting error will be indicated by outputting EE01 to the input word if any
values other than those listed above are specified. The setting will be invalid.
2. Automatically written to EEPROM when the parameter setting is changed.
3. Set up the system to ensure that EEPROM is not written to more than
100,000 times.
4. The decimal point will be adjusted if the range is changed to another range
with a different number of decimal places. Adjust the setting as necessary
after changing ranges. (Example: If a 0.01 °C range is changed to a 0.1 °C
256
Section 2-6
Application
range and the input shift value was 0.05 °C, the setting would be changed
to 0.5
5. Heater burnout detection will not be performed if the alarm setting is 0.0 or
50 A. The heater burnout alarm output will turn OFF if the setting is
changed to 0.0 A and will turn ON if the setting is changed to 50 A.
6. The current manipulated variable will be monitored.
7. The initial manual manipulated variable will be set to maintain the output
level before Manual Mode was entered.
8. Always check the “Write Completed Flag” to be sure that the write to EEPROM has been completed when setting a parameter that is stored in EEPROM. A minimum of 60 ms is required to complete writing to EEPROM.
If a power interruption or other problem prevents confirming the write operation, reset the value after power is restored or the problem corrected.
Status Data
Units with Four Loops
Input
word
Loop
number
Control output
0: OFF
1: ON
Autotuning
0: Normal
1: Autotuning
Sensor error
0: Normal
1: Error
RUN/STOP status of specified loop
Manual/auto status of specified loop
0: RUN
1: STOP
0: Auto
1: Manual
257
Section 2-6
Application
Units with Two Loops and Heater Burnout alarms
Input
word
Loop
number
Control output Autotuning
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Normal
1: Autotuning
Sensor error
0: Normal
1: Error
Heater burnout alarm output CT input error
0: OFF
0: Normal
1: ON
1: Error
RUN/STOP status of specified loop
0: RUN
1: STOP
Manual/auto status of specified loop
0: Auto
1: Manual
Note The RUN/STOP and manual/auto status will be given for the loop specified in
the I/O allocation command.
2-6-2
Using Operation Control Commands
The following procedure is used to control the Unit.
60 ms max.
(1)
Output word
Input word
1,2,3...
(2)
C(((
See note.
C(((
1. Output word: An operation control command (C@@@@) is set to specify
the loop and the operation.
2. Input word: The operation control command set in the output word will be
set as a “Command Acknowledged Flag” to indicate that the command has
been acknowledged.
Note The value set by the previous command will be valid as soon as the next command is acknowledged.
258
Section 2-6
Application
Operation Control Commands
Command
(Set in output word;
see notes 1 and 2.)
Note
Operation
Validity (See note 3.)
CCC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CCD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
STOP
RUN
Always (STOP/RUN in
Auto Mode)
CDC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CDD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
Manual Mode (See note 4.)
Auto Mode
Not valid during autotuning.
CFC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
Autotuning (See note 5.)
PID control (Not valid during Manual Mode or
STOP.)
CFD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CEEA (See note 6.)
Cancel autotuning
Writing set point to
EEPROM
PID control
Always
1. The Unit will start in Auto Mode in STOP status when power is turned ON.
Function
DIP switch
PID
Autotuning
RUN
Auto
ON/OFF
STOP
Manual
Cannot be changed during autotuning.
2. Input the loop number for @ in the command codes. “A” is used to indicate
all loops. When “A” is used, the operation control command will not be executed for any loops if even one of the four loops does not meet the write
conditions. For example, a setting error will occur (EE01) if the AUTOTUNING command is set when loops 1 to 3 are in RUN status and loop 4 is in
STOP status.
3. The following table shows the conditions required to execute the operation
control commands and the error codes that will occur when the command
causes an error.
Current status
Auto RUN PID AT
Mode
Not
AT
ON/OFF
STOP
Manual Mode
RUN
STOP
Auto
Mode
CDD@
Manual
Mode
CDC@
CCD@
CCC@
❍
❍
❍
❍
EE00
EE00
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
AT
CFC@
Cancel
AT
CFD@
Write
SP
CEEA
I/O allocation commands
C@@@
Write
Read
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
EE00
❍
❍
❍
EE01
EE01
EE01
EE01
EE01
EE01
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍ = Command valid
Errors: EE00 = Parameter change attempted during autotuning.
EE01 = Setting error
When “A” is used to specify all loops, the command will not be executed
for any loops if even one of the four loops does not meet execution conditions.
4. During manual operation, the manual manipulated variable will be output
regardless of RUN/STOP status.
259
Section 2-6
Application
5. Parameters cannot be written and Manual Mode cannot be specified for
loops for which autotuning is being executed. An error response (EE00)
will be written to the input word if an attempt to do so is made.
After confirming acknowledgement of the autotuning command, change
the command code to an I/O allocation command other than one to set PID
parameters, e.g., a read–only command (C7@@).
• If the autotuning command is left in the output word, autotuning will be
repeated as soon as it has been completed.
• After the autotuning command has been acknowledged, the setting for
the I/O allocation command just prior to the operation control command will be valid for the output word. The following is an example of
this.
a) An I/O allocation command is written to the output word to set the proportional band.
b) The autotuning command is executed and command reception acknowledged.
c) The set value for the proportion band (50.0) is written to the output
word. Although autotuning will set the PID parameters according to autotuning results, here the value will be immediately changed to 50.0 as
a result of the I/O allocation command set before autotuning.
6. The set point will be written to EEPROM when the CEEA command is executed. The set point may not be written correctly if power is interrupted
during the write operation. At least 60 ms is required to complete the write
operation after the CEEA command is executed. Always be sure to confirm
the Command Acknowledgment Flag in the input word when writing the set
point to EEPROM.
Executing Commands from a Programming Console
The following words are allocated to the Temperature Control Unit in these
examples:
Input word = IR 001
Output word = IR 100
I/O Allocation Commands
1,2,3...
The following procedure would be used to write a set point of 100 °C for loop 1
and then monitor the process value for loop 1.
1. Start by monitoring IR 001 and IR 100 on the Programming Console.
? ?
2. Write “C071” to the output word to specify setting the set point and reading
the process value.
“C071” will be written to the input word to acknowledge the command.
? ?
+ % + %
3. Write the set point for loop 1 (100 °C) to the output word.
The process value for loop 1 will be written to the input word, indicating that
the write operation has been completed.
? ?
#
260
Section 2-6
Application
Note If the contents of IR 100 are left unchanged, the process value in
IR 001 will be updated every 500 ms.
Operation Control
Commands
The following procedure would be used to switch to RUN status for all loops.
1,2,3...
1. Start by monitoring IR 001 and IR 1000 on the Programming Console.
? ?
? ?
2. Write “CCDA” to the output word to specify RUN status for all loops.
“CCDA” will be written to the input word to acknowledge the command.
? ?
++,) ++,)
261
Section 2-7
IOTC(––)
2-7
IOTC(––)
The IOTC(– –) instruction is supported by CX-Programmer version 2.0 or later
and CPU Unit lot number 0160 or later. The SYSMAC Support Software can
also be used by uploading the expansion instructions from a CPU Unit with a
lot number of 0160 or later.
2-7-1
Sending I/O Allocation Commands
IOTC(––) can be used to set, write, or monitor more than one data item at the
same time, simplifying the ladder program.
IOTC (– –)
S
C: First word of I/O command area for Temperature Control Unit
S: First source word containing write data
D
D: First destination for read data
C
C
First word
Output word address (BCD: 0100 to 0115)
Specify the address of the output word allocated to the Unit.
+1
Input word address (BCD: 0001 to 0015)
Specify the address of the input word allocated to the Unit.
+2
Work word 1: Do not used.
+3
Work word 2: Do not used.
+4
Number of I/O allocation commands
+5
I/O allocation command 0
+6
I/O allocation command 1
Write data 0
Read data 0
+7
I/O allocation command 2
Write data 1
Read data 1
+8
I/O allocation command 3
Write data 2
Read data 2
Write data 3
Read data 3
.
.
.
I/O allocation command n–1
n+4
Used by the system software in the CPU Unit.
Setting: 0001 to 0099
S
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
Write data n–1
I/O allocation commands
C
Loop number (1 to 4)
Monitor item
Set item
Note
First word
Read data n–1
Monitor data specified in
command.
Timeout error: E900
Other errors: See error response codes at the end of
this section.
1. Do not execute a macro instruction for the same Unit until execution of any
previously executed macro instructions has been completed. Data may not
be set correctly if more than one instruction is executed at the same time.
2. The same IOTC(––) instruction will not be executed again until the input
condition has turned OFF for at least one scan. Also, if the input condition
turns OFF and then back ON before execution has been completed, the
instruction will be executed again from the beginning.
3. Refer to 2-6-1 Communications Procedure for setting and monitor items
and ranges.
4. Up to a maximum of 120 ms will be required to complete each I/O allocation command for a normal response (timeout error: 200 ms). The total
time to complete all commands will be a maximum of (0.12 s x refresh time
x 2) x the number of commands.
262
Section 2-7
IOTC(––)
Operand Data Ranges
Note
Area
IR or SR
C
000 to 247
S
000 to 255
D
000 to 252
HR
AR
HR 00 to HR 94
AR 00 to AR 22
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
LF
Timer/
Counter
DM
LR 00 to LR 58
---
LR 00 to LR 63
TIM/CNT 000 to 511
LR 00 to LR 63
---
DM 0000 to DM 6138
DM 0000 to DM 6655
DM 0000 to DM 6143
EM
Indirectly
addressed
DM
Indirectly
addressed
EM
EM 0000 to EM 6138 EM 0000 to EM 6143
*DM 0000 to *DM 6655
EM 0000 to EM 6143
Constants
---
*EM 0000 to *EM 6143
*0000 to FFFF
---
1. Be sure that the above ranges are not exceeded by the number of words
required for n commands.
2. If there are errors in the operand or word address specifications, the ER
Flag will turn ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Flags
SR 25503 (ER Flag)
ON for error in operands or word addresses.
ON if the specified number of commands causes a
memory area boundary to be exceeded.
SR 25506 (Equals Flag)
ON when all commands have been acknowledged.
If a setting range error (EE01) occurs for an item being
set or a timeout error (E900) occurs for an I/O allocation
command, the settings will not be written. Be sure to
check the read data to confirm execution.
Note Operation control commands can be set along with I/O allocation commands.
If an operation control command is set, set the same write data for the operation control command as was set for the I/O allocation command just prior to
it.
2-7-2
Sending Operation Control Commands
IOTC(––) can be used to send a single operation control command, simplifying the ladder program.
IOTC (––)
C
C: First word of area to specify the Temperature Control Unit
#
#: Operation control command: C@@@
D
D: First destination for response data
C
Output word address (BCD: 0100 to 0115)
Specify the address of the output word allocated to the Unit.
+1
Input word address (BCD: 0001 to 0015)
Specify the address of the input word allocated to the Unit.
+2
Work word 1: Do not use.
+3
Work word 2: Do not use.
First word
Used by the system software in the CPU Unit.
263
Section 2-7
IOTC(––)
Operation Control Commands
Command
(Set in output word.)
Operation
CCC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CCD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
STOP
RUN
CDC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CDD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
Manual Mode
Auto Mode
CFC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CFD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
Autotuning
Cancel autotuning
CEEA
Writing set point to
EEPROM
Note Refer to page 259 for details.
D
Specified word
Response to operation control command
Input data
Operand Data Ranges
Area
C
D
IR or SR
HR
000 to 250
HR 00 to HR 97
000 to 252
HR 00 to HR 99
AR
LF
AR 00 to AR 25
LR 00 to LR 61
AR 00 to AR 27
LR 00 to LR 63
DM
DM 0000 to DM 6141
DM 0000 to DM 6143
EM
Indirectly
addressed DM
EM 0000 to EM 6141
*DM 0000 to *DM 6155
EM 0000 to EM 6143
Indirectly
addressed EM
*EM 0000 to *EM 6143
Note If there are errors in the operand or word address specifications, the ER Flag
will turn ON and the instruction will not be executed.
Flags
SR 25503 (ER Flag)
SR 25506 (Equals Flag)
ON for error in operands or word addresses.
ON if the a memory area boundary is exceeded.
ON when command has been acknowledged.
Sample Program 1
The IOTC(––) instruction can be used with a CQM1H CPU Unit with a lot
number of 0160 or later.
Switch Settings
The following switch settings are used.
Function DIP switch (SW1):
Pins 1 and 5 turned ON = PID heating control , °C unit, 4-digit BCD
Input type DIP switch (SW2):
Pins 1 and 5 turned ON = Thermocouples, 0.0 and 500.0 °C, loops 1
to 4
Operations
A) Power supply turned ON (STOP status, initialization).
B) Set point for loop 2 set to 100.0 °C and control period changed from 20 s
(default setting) to 5 s.
C) Autotuning executed for loop 2 after RUN started.
D) RUN started and process values monitored for all loops after autotuning for
loop 2 completed.
264
Section 2-7
IOTC(––)
Word Allocations
The following words are allocated to the Temperature Control Unit.
Input word: IR 001
Output word: IR 100
(1) Data for Changing the Set Point and Control Period
C
Word
DM 0000
S
Contents
0100
DM 0100
(Output word)
DM 0001
0001
DM 0002
Word
(Set point: 100°C)
5
DM 0101
(Input word)
D
Setting
1000
Word
(Control period: 5 s)
Monitor
DM 0200
Process
value
DM 0201
Status
0000
(Not used)
DM 0003
0000
(Not used)
DM 0004
0002
(Number of I/O
allocation commands)
DM 0005
C072
(C0: Set point
7: Process value
2: Loop)
DM 0006
C592
(C5: Control period
9: Status
2: Loop)
When setting several loops, increase the number of
commands in DM0004 and set them in order from DM0005.
(2) Operation Control Commands
DM 0007
S
0100
(Output word)
DM 0008
Word
(2)-1
#CCD2
CCD: RUN
2: Loop
DM 0202
2 loops
RUN
#CFC2
CFC: AT
2: Loop
DM 0203
2 loops
AT
#CCDA
CCD: RUN
A: All loops
DM 0204
All loops
RUN
Word
DM 0102
Setting
0000
(For read: 0)
Word
DM 0205
Monitor
Loop 1
process value
DM 0103
0000
(For read: 0)
DM 0206
Loop 2
process value
DM 0104
0000
(For read: 0)
DM 0207
Loop 3
process value
DM 0105
0000
(For read: 0)
DM 0208
Loop 4
process value
0000
(Not used)
DM 0010
D
Meaning
Response
0001
(Input word)
DM 0009
Command
(2)-2
0000
(Not used)
(2)-3
(3) Monitoring Process Values
DM 0011
DM 0012
S
0100
(Output word)
0001
(Input word)
DM 0013
0000
(Not used)
DM 0014
DM 0015
0000
(Not used)
0004
(Number of I/O
allocation commands)
D
DM 0016
C771
(C7: Read
7: Process value
1: Loop)
C772
DM 0017
(C7: Read
7: Process value
2: Loop)
C773
DM 0018
(C7: Read
7: Process value
3: Loop)
C774
DM 0019
(C7: Read
7: Process value
4: Loop)
265
Section 2-7
IOTC(––)
25315
SET
01600
01600: Work bit
#FFFF
Power ON and Unit initialization completed.
01600
CMP (20)
001
25506 (=)
@ASL (25)
016
Unit reset after initialization. FFFF indicated
for binary indications.
(1) Changing the Set Point and Control Period
01601
IOTC (––)
DM 0000
DM 0100
I/O allocation commands sent.
(Writing set point and control cycle)
DM 0200
25506 (=)
@ASL (25)
016
Normal end to I/O allocation commands.
25503 (ER)
01700
00115
00114
00113
00112
01601
Checking write parameters
SET
01701
(2) Operation Control Commands
01602
Macro instruction error occurred. (Commands must be repeated after debugging.)
(Leftmost 4 bits in IR001 will be "1110" (E) if an
error has occurred and IR 01701 will be turned ON.
01701
IOTC (––)
DM 0007
#CCD2
25506 (=)
RUN start for loop 2.
DM 0202
@ASL (25)
016
RUN acknowledged.
25503 (ER)
01702
Macro instruction error.
01603
IOTC (––)
DM 0007
Loop 2 autotuning started.
#CFC2
DM 0203
25506 (=)
@ASL (25)
016
01604
AT command acknowledged. (AT command
must be change after it is acknowledged. It
will be repeated if not changed.)
IOTC (––)
DM 0007
RUN start for all loops (wildcard command)
#CCDA
25506 (=)
DM 0204
@ASL (25)
RUN acknowledged.
016
(3) Monitoring Process Values
01605
01800
IOTC (––)
DM 0011
Process value monitor for all loops.
DM 0102
25506 (=)
DM 0205
01800
Turns OFF input condition for IOTC(––) for
one scan to ensure continuous execution)
01704
Error check
DIFU (13)
01605
00115
00114 00113
00112
END (01)
266
Section 2-7
IOTC(––)
Sample Program 2
The IOTC(––) instruction cannot be used with a CQM1H CPU Unit with a lot
number earlier than 0160.
Switch Settings
The following switch settings are used.
Function DIP switch (SW1):
Pins 1 and 5 turned ON = PID heating control , °C unit, 4-digit BCD
Input type DIP switch (SW2):
Pins 1 and 5 turned ON = Thermocouples, 0.0 and 500.0 °C, loops 1
to 4
Operations
For loop 1: Power supply turned ON (STOP status, initialization), set point for
set to 100.0 °C, control started (RUN), and then process value monitored.
Word Allocations
The following words are allocated to the Temperature Control Unit or used in
programming.
Input word:
Output word:
Loop 1 process value:
Startup error check:
IR 001
IR 100
DM 0010
IR 01700
25315
SET
01600
For switching RUN only
#FFFF
Power ON and Unit initialization
checked.
01600
CMP (20)
001
25506 (=)
Power ON and Unit initialization
completed.
@ASL (25)
016
(1) Changing the Set Point
01601
00115
00114 00113
00112
01700
01601
MOV (21)
#C071
100
Error Check
(Leftmost 4 bits in IR001 will be "1110" (E)
if an error has occurred and IR 01701 will
be turned ON.
I/O allocation command set.
Setting: Set point for loop 1
Monitor: Process value for loop 1
CMP (20)
#C071
001
Command reception checked.
(Always confirm reception before writing set value.)
25506 (=)
ASL (25)
016
Command acknowledged.
267
Section 2-7
IOTC(––)
01602
MOV (21)
#1000
100
Set point (100.0 °) written to output word.
CMP (20)
#C071
Set point reception checked.
001
25506 (=)
ASL (25)
016
00115
00114
00113
00112
Set point write confirmed.
01603
01701
Error check (indicated set point
was written correctly).
(2) Operation Control Commands
01603
01701
MOV (21)
#CCD1
100
Operation control command: RUN
(written when set point has been
set correctly).
CMP (20)
#CCD1
RUN reception checked.
001
25506 (=)
ASL (25)
RUN acknowledged.
016
(3) Monitoring Process Values
01604
MOV (21)
#1000
100
Same set value as before (1000)
allocated to output (status of
previously specified I/O allocation command).
CMP (20)
#CCD1
Set data (1000) confirmed.
001
25506 (=)
ASL (25)
016
Acknowledged.
001
Process value of loop 1 moved to
DM 0010.
01605
MOV (21)
DM 0010
END (01)
268
Section 2-8
Troubleshooting
2-8
Troubleshooting
Error
Watchdog timer error
“EEEE” set in input
word.
RAM read/write error
“E100” set in input
word.
EEPROM error
“E120” set in input
word.
Control output
OFF for all outputs.
Remedy
Turn the power supply OFF and then back
ON. If the error persists, replace the Unit.
Parameter change during autotuning
“EE00” set in input
word.
Normal operation will
continue.
Set parameter after autotuning has been
completed.
Setting range error
“EE01” set in input
word.
Reset the setting to within the proper range.
Sensor error
“E400” set in input word Auto Mode: OFF for
when process value is
control loop with error.
monitored for a loop.
Manual Mode: Operation will continue with
manual output level.
CT input error
“E500” set in input word The heater burnout
when heater current is alarm output will mainmonitored for a loop.
tain the same status as
before the CT input
error.
“E900” is output to the
Normal operation will
destination word (D) for continue.
the IOTC(––) instruction.
Check the connections to the input sensor
and cold junction compensator.
Check the sensor for broken or shorted wiring.
Check the sensor connections to be sure
they have not been reversed.
Be sure the correct sensor and compensating lead are connected.
Be sure the input temperature range has
not been exceeded.
Check the cold junction compensator to be
sure it is connected properly.
Be sure the sensor and input type settings
agree.
Be sure the input type DIP switch and the
function DIP switch settings are correct.
The current is 55 A or higher. Reduce the
heater current to below 55 A.
Timeout error (for
IOTC(––) instruction)
The set value for the I/O allocation command will not have been written. Repeat the
setting.
Error Priority
The error code with the highest priority will be set then more than one error
occurs at the same time. The errors are given in order of priority in the above
table.
269
Section 2-9
Command Tables
2-9
Command Tables
I/O Allocation Commands
C
Output word
Loop number: 1 to 4
Item To Be Set
Value
Item To Be Monitored
Item to be set
Value
Item to be monitored
0
1
Set point
Proportional band (for advanced PID)
0
1
Set point
Proportional band (for advanced PID)
2
3
Integral time (for advanced PID)
Derivative time (for advanced PID)
2
3
Integral time (for advanced PID)
Derivative time (for advanced PID)
4
5
Hysteresis (for ON/OFF control)
4
Control cycle (for advanced PID or manual control) 5
Hysteresis (for ON/OFF control)
Control cycle (for advanced PID or manual control)
6
7
Input shift value
No item set
6
7
Input shift value
Process value
8
9
Manual manipulated variable
Do not set.
8
9
Manipulated variable
Status
A
Heater burnout alarm setting (only for models with
heater burnout alarms)
A
Heater burnout alarm setting (only for models with
heater burnout alarms)
B
Do not set.
B
Heater current (only for models with heater burnout
alarms)
Operation Control Commands
Command
Operation
Validity
CCC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CCD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
STOP
RUN
Always (STOP/RUN in Auto
Mode)
CDC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
Manual Mode
Not valid during autotuning.
CDD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CFC@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
Auto Mode
Autotuning
CFD@ (@ = 1 to 4 or A)
CEEA
Cancel autotuning
Writing set point to
EEPROM
PID control (Not valid during
Manual Mode or STOP.)
PID control
Always
Error Responses
Error
Meaning
response
EEEE
Watchdog timer error
270
Remarks
Turn the power supply OFF and then
back ON. If the error persists, replace
the Unit.
E100
E120
RAM read/write error
EEPROM error
EE00
EE01
Parameter change during autotuning
Setting range error
Set parameter after autotuning has
been completed.
Setting is out of range.
E400
Sensor error
Input error, sensor wire break, sensor
short, etc.
E500
E900
CT input error
Timeout error (for IOTC(––)
instruction)
Input of 55.0 A or more.
Response time of 200 ms or higher
for macro instruction
SECTION 3
CQM1-TC00@/TC10@ Temperature Control Units
This section describes the features and operation of the CQM1-TC00@/TC10@ Temperature Control Units.
3-1
Features and Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
272
3-1-1
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
272
3-1-2
Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
272
3-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
3-3
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
274
3-3-1
Control Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
3-3-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
3-4
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
3-5
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
3-5-1
Basic Program for Temperature Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
3-5-2
Run/Stop and Error Processing Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
3-5-3
ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
280
3-5-4
Advanced PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
3-6
3-7
AT (Expansion Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
282
3-6-1
Manual Settings (Expansion Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
283
3-6-2
Set Value Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
285
3-6-3
Set Value Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
271
Section 3-1
Features and Word Allocations
3-1
3-1-1
Features and Word Allocations
Features
• The PID with advanced feed-forward circuitry (2 degrees of freedom) of
the CQM1-TC00@/TC10@ assures stable temperature control. The Units
can be set to ON/OFF control.
• CQM1-TC00@ Temperature Control Units for thermocouples and CQM1TC10@ Temperature Control Units for platinum resistance thermometers
are available. Each Temperature Control Unit can be used for two-loop
temperature control.
Temperature control Units
Temperature sensor
Output type
NPN output
Thermocouple
Platinum resistance thermometer
3-1-2
PNP output
CQM1-TC001
CQM1-TC101
CQM1-TC002
CQM1-TC102
Word Allocations
I/O
Address
15
12 11
Bit
8 7
Output
m
m+1
Loop 1 set point (SP)
Loop 2 set point (SP)
Input
n
n+1
Loop 1 process value (PV)
Loop 2 process value (PV)
4 3
0
• One word each can be allocated for inputs and outputs if only one control
loop is used (when DIP switch pin 5 is ON).
• Two words each will be allocated for inputs and outputs if two control
loops are used (when DIP switch pin 5 is OFF),
• Data is handled as four digits of BCD, except that an F in the leftmost digit
is used to indicate negative values. The meaning of each digit is shown
below.
CQM1-TC00@:103-102-101-100, e.g., F999 = –999
CQM1-TC10@:102-101-100-10–1, e.g., F999 = –99.9
• The set point setting range is as follows:
F999 to 9999, or CCCC
• The contents of the process value is as follows:
F999 to 9999: Process value
E@@@:
Error code
FFFF:
Initialization
272
Section 3-2
Specifications
3-2
Specifications
General Specifications
The general specifications of the CQM1-TC00@/TC10@ conform to those of
the CQM1H/CQM1 Series.
Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
Sensors used with thermocouples
CQM1-TC00@ K: –200 to 1,300 °C (–300 to 2,300 °F)
CQM1-TC00@ J: –100 to 850 °C (–100 to 1,500 °F)
Sensors used with platinum
resistance thermometers
Number of control loops
CQM1-TC10@ JPt100: –99.9 to 450.0 °C (–99.9 to 800.0 °F)
CQM1-TC10@ Pt100: –99.9 to 450.0 °C (–99.9 to 800.0 °F)
Two (either 1 or 2 loops can be used)
Control output
NPN or PNP output with short-circuit protection
Input sensors and set
point ranges
Power supply voltage: 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Maximum switching capacity: 100 mA per output
Leakage current: 0.3 mA max.
Residual voltage: 3.0 V max.
Control mode
Setting and display accuracy
ON/OFF or advanced PID control (2 degrees of freedom)
CQM1-TC00@: (Process value ±1% or ±3 °C, whichever is
larger) ±1 digit max.
CQM1-TC10@:
(Process value ±1% or ±2 °C, whichever is
larger) ±1 digit max.
Hysteresis
Proportional band
0.8 °C/°F
40.0 °C/°F
Derivative time
Integral time
240 s
40 s
Control period
Sampling period
20 s
1s
Output refresh period
Current consumption
1s
220 mA max. at 5 VDC
Weight
Dimensions
200 g max.
32 x 110 x 107 mm (W x H x D)
Dimensions
All dimensions are in millimeters.
273
Section 3-3
Nomenclature
3-3
Nomenclature
Front View
Ready indicator (green, lit when the Unit is recognized as the Temperature Control Unit)
Word number indicator (orange, lit when two words are
used and not lit when a single word is used)
Terminal screws: M3
(Optimum tightening torque: 0.5 N • m)
Side View
Function DIP switch (SW1)
Slide lock
Slide lock
274
Terminals
Cover
Section 3-3
Nomenclature
3-3-1
Control Modes
Control is performed independently for each control loop based on the set
point data. The relationship between the set point data and the control operation is shown in the following table.
Set point
F999 to 9999
Control operation
Normal temperature control performed.
CCCC
Other settings
Control stopped.
Temperature control performed according to the most recent valid
set point data. The PV will be EE01.
If the temperature exceeds the range from –999 to 9999, the process value
data in the Temperature Controller will be frozen at –999 or 9999 and the data
will be maintained at F999 or 9999, respectively.
The process value data will be set to FFFF during initialization; do not read
the data as the process value at this time.
Short-circuit Protection
3-3-2
If the output is shorted, short-circuit protection will operate, turning the output
OFF. To reset the short-circuit protection, either turn off the power supply or
set the set point data to CCCC to stop control operation.
Switch Settings
1,2,3...
1. Set the function DIP switch pins (SW1) before connecting the Temperature
Control Unit to the other Units of the PC.
2. All pins on the DIP switch are factory-set to OFF.
3. Use a pen tip or other pointed object to set the pins of the DIP switch.
Pin
Function
OFF
ON
1
2
Control mode
Control operation
ON/OFF
Reverse (heating control)
Advanced PID
Normal (cooling control)
3
4
Temperature scale
Input sensor
5
Number of control loops
(control points)
Control period
°C
TC00@: K
TC10@: JPt100
Two loops
°F
TC00@: J
TC10@: Pt100
One loop
20 s
2s
6
Control Operation
Reverse Control
Used for heating control with heaters. If the temperature is lower than the set
temperature (i.e., the temperature has negative deviation), the output of the
heaters will be increased.
Normal Control
Used for suppressing excessively high temperature with cooling water. If the
temperature is higher than the set temperature (i.e., the temperature has positive deviation), the output of the cooling water will be increased.
275
Section 3-4
Wiring
3-4
Wiring
Wiring
CQM1-TC001
CQM1-TC002
–
–
Loop 1
+ TC
Loop 1
+ TC
Cold junction
compensator
Loop 2
OUT
Cold junction
compensator
–
–
Loop 2
+ TC
Loop 2
+ TC
Loop 1
OUT
+ DC
COM
L
Loop 1
OUT
Loop 2
OUT
COM
0V
L
L
L
+ 24 VDC
+ 24 VDC
Note When using only one control loop, short-circuit the loop 2 input terminals. If
used with the terminals open, “E400” (PV error) will be read into the CPU Unit
for approximately 10 seconds when power is turned ON.
CQM1-TC101
CQM1-TC102
B
B
B
B
Loop 1
Pt
A
B
A
B
B
B
Loop 2
Pt
A
Loop 2
OUT
Loop 1
Pt
Loop 2
Pt
A
Loop 1
OUT
Loop 1
OUT
Loop 2
OUT
+ DC
COM
COM
0V
L
L
L
L
+ 24 VDC
+ 24 VDC
• Do not touch or remove the cold junction compensator. (CQM1-TC001/
TC002)
• Connect to loop 1 terminals and turn ON pin 5 on SW1 when using only
one control loop.
• Use the input sensor set on the function DIP switch.
276
Section 3-5
Application Examples
Output Interface
Output Characteristeics
Maximum switching capability
100 mA, 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Leakage current
Residual voltage
0.3 mA max.
3.0 V max.
External supply voltage
15 mA min., 24 VDC +10%/–15% (excluding load current)
Output Circuits
CQM1-TC 01 (NPN)
CQM1-TC 02 (PNP)
+DC
COM
OUT
OUT
COM
3-5
0V
Application Examples
3-5-1
Basic Program for Temperature Control Unit
Operation (for Control
Loop 1 Only)
The contents of DM 0000 are written to the Temperature Control Unit as the
set point.
The process value is read from the Temperature Control Unit and written to
DM 0001. If an error has occurred, however, the value written to DM 0001 will
be treated as an error code.
Word/Bit Allocations (for
Control Loop 1 Only)
25313
Temperature Control Unit input word
IR 001
Temperature Control Unit output word
Set point storage word
IR 100
DM 0000
Process value storage word
Initialization End Flag
DM 0001
IR 01600
Always ON Flag
CMP(20)
#FFFF
001
The contents of IR 001 is compared to FFFF to
confirm that the Temperature Control has completed initialization processing. (See note 3)
25506 (=)
01600
If the process value (contents of IR 001) is not
FFFF, IR 01600 is turned ON to indicate that
initialization has been completed.
01600
MOV(21)
DM0000
If IR 01600 is ON, the contents of DM 0000 will
be written as the set point to IR 100.
100
MOV(21)
001
If IR 01600 is ON, the contents of IR 001 will
be read to DM 0001 as the process value.
DM0001
END(01)
277
Section 3-5
Application Examples
Note
1. Write a program for control loop 2 in the same way.
2. The contents of both DM 0000 and DM 0001 are four-digit BCD except that
an F in the leftmost digit is used to indicate negative values. The meaning
of each digit is shown below.
CQM1-TC00@: 103-102-101-100, e.g., F999 = –999
CQM1-TC10@: 102-101-100-10–1, e.g., F999 = –99.9
3. The process value data will be set to FFFF during initialization; do not read
the data as the process value at this time.
DM 0000
Write a value in the following ranges to DM 0000 according to the sensor to be
used.
Model
TC00@ for thermocouples
Sensor
Range
K
–200 to 1,300 °C (F200 to 1300)
–300 to 2,300 °F (F300 to 2300)
–100 to 850 °C (F100 to 0850)
–100 to 1,500 °F (F100 to 1500)
J
TC10@ for platinum resistance ther- JPt100
mometers
–99.9 to 450.0 °F (F999 to 4500)
–99.9 to 800.0 °F (F999 to 8000)
Pt100
3-5-2
–99.9 to 450.0 °C (F999 to 4500)
–99.9 to 800.0 °F (F999 to 8000)
Run/Stop and Error Processing Program
Operation (for Control
Loop 1 Only)
The contents of DM 0000 are written to the Temperature Control Unit as the
set point.
The process value is read from the Temperature Control Unit and written to
DM 0001. If an error has occurred, however, the value written to DM 0001 will
be treated as an error code.
If the CQM1-TC00@/TC10@ in operation has an error, the condition of the
error is stored as error status.
Temperature control is enabled or disabled by turning the RUN/STOP bit ON
or OFF (loop 1 Only).
Word/Bit Allocations (for
Control Loop 1 Only)
Item
278
Word
Remarks
Temperature Control Unit input IR 001
word (loop 1)
---
Temperature Control Unit output word (loop 1)
Set point storage word
IR 100
---
DM 0000
---
Process value storage word
Initialization End Flag
DM 0001
IR 01600
-----
Error status
IR 017
RUN/Stop bit
IR 01800
IR 01700: ON for input sensor error.
IR 01701: ON for setting range error.
IR 01702: ON for Watchdog timer,
RAM, Read/Write, or
EEPROM error.
IR 01715: ON for any error.
Control operations will be run when IR
01800 is turned OFF and will be
stopped when it is turned ON.
Section 3-5
Application Examples
25313
Always ON Flag
CMP(20)
#FFFF
001
25506
01600
00115
The contents of IR 001 is compared to FFFF to
confirm that the Temperature Control has completed initialization processing.
(=)
00114
00113
01600
If the process value (contents of IR 001) is not
FFFF, IR 01600 is turned ON to indicate that
initialization has been completed.
01715
If the leftmost four bits of IR 001 are 1110 (E),
IR 01715 is turned ON to signal an error.
00112
01715
CMP(20)
#EE01
A comparison is made to EE01 to see if a setting range error has occurred.
001
25506
(=)
01701
CMP(20)
#E400
If the process value is EE01, IR 01701 is
turned ON to signal a setting range error.
A comparison is made to E400 to see if an input sensor error has occurred.
001
25506
01700
01600
(=)
01700
If the process value is E400, IR 01700 is
turned ON to signal an input sensor error.
01702
If neither a setting range error nor an input
sensor error has occurred, IR 01702 is turned
ON to signal other errors.
01701
01800
MOV(21)
DM0000
If IR 01800 is OFF, the contents of DM 0000
will be written as the set point to IR 100.
100
01800
MOV(21)
#CCCC
If IR 01800 is ON, CCCC will be written to IR
100.
100
MOV(21)
001
The contents of IR 001 is written to DM 0001
as the process value.
DM0001
01701
Setting range error processing program
If IR 01701 is ON, the correct set point value
data must be set.
(Continued on the next page)
279
Section 3-5
Application Examples
01700
Input sensor error processing program
If IR 01700 is ON, check the connections to the
input sensor and cold junction compensator. If
connections are correct for both the input sensor and cold junction compensator, replace the
Unit.
Watchdog timer, RAM read/write, and
EEPROM error processing program
If IR 01702 is ON, turn power OFF and then
back on. If the error persists, replace the Unit.
01702
END(01)
Note If more than one error occurs at the same time, the error with the highest priority will be output as the process value data.
Error priority from highest to lowest is as follows:
Watchdog timer > RAM read/write > EEPROM > Setting range > Input sensor
3-5-3
ON/OFF Control
The default value of the ON/OFF control hysteresis (i.e., SW1-1 is turned
OFF) of the Temperature Control Unit is 0.8 °C/°F. Refer to 3-6-1 Manual Settings (Expansion Mode) for details on changing the hysteresis.
The following table lists the effectiveness of hysteresis adjustment.
Adjustment
280
Effect
Reduce the value
• The hunting amplitude becomes small.
• When the process value is fluttering near the set point, the
output becomes unstable.
• The period between the output turned ON and turned OFF
becomes short.
Increase the value
• The hunting amplitude becomes large.
• The output near the set point becomes stable.
• The period between the output turned ON and turned OFF
becomes long.
Section 3-5
Application Examples
If ON/OFF control is used, in the following graph hunting, the amplitude and
period of which depend on the controlled object, will occur even if the hysteresis of the Temperature Control Unit is adjusted. If the hunting is not within the
permissible range determined by the user, use advanced PID control.
Temperature
SP
Hysteresis
PV
Time
100%
MV
0%
3-5-4
Advanced PID Control
If advanced PID control (i.e., SW1-1 is turned ON) is selected, the Temperature Control Unit will operate with the P value fixed to 40.0, the I value fixed to
240, and the D value fixed to 40.
The user’s required control may not be performed with the default PID parameters. In this case, refer to 3-6 AT (Expansion Mode) and 3-6-1 Manual Settings (Expansion Mode) to set the most suitable PID parameters.
Even if the most suitable PID parameters are set, hunting may occur if the
control period is long. In this case, set SW1-6 according to the characteristics
of the controlled object. If SW1-6 is turned OFF, the control period will be 20 s
and if SW1-6 is turned ON, the control period will be 2 s.
When the control period is set to 2 s (i.e., SW1-6 is turned ON), it can be set
to 1 through 99 s freely. Refer to 3-6-1 Manual Settings (Expansion Mode) for
details.
281
Section 3-6
AT (Expansion Mode)
3-6
AT (Expansion Mode)
To enter the Expansion Mode, change the connection of jumper connector
from 2-3 to 1-2.
Left-side View of the Unit
MODE
1
SW1
Default setting
3
Change the connection to 1-2
MODE
1
MODE
Expansion Mode
3
TEST
Do not change this connection. This is for factory-use only.
Change this connection.
By executing AT (auto-tuning), the most suitable PID parameters can be set.
The AT function allows PID parameter calculation by recognizing the characteristics of the object from the waveform (amplitude and period) to be generated when ON/OFF control is executed (refer to the following diagram). The
PID parameters obtained will be refreshed automatically, and after completion
of auto-tuning, the Temperature Control Unit will start operating using the
parameters.
SP
Limit period with 100%
controlled variation width
Auto-tuning starts
0
282
Auto-tuning completes
Section 3-6
AT (Expansion Mode)
Auto-tuning can be started by taking the following procedure on the Programming Console.
Default: SP = 100 °C and PV = 98 °C
? ?
'&
Write the AT start code “CF00” to the output word of the relevant loop and
confirm that the input word will become CF00.
? ?
+. +.
Set SP to 100 °C again.
? ?
'&
To cancel auto-tuning, use the code “CF01” instead and follow the above procedure.
Note
1. To put the Temperature Control Unit into expansion mode, change the
jumper pin on the side of the Unit from 2 and 3 to 1 and 2.
2. Auto-tuning is not available if the half period exceeds 9999 s (approximately 2 hours 45 minutes). If the half cycle exceeds 9999 s, no measurement
is possible and the Temperature Control Unit will restart auto-tuning automatically.
3. If the output word data is left as CF00, auto-tuning will be repeated. Be
sure to return it to the set value.
3-6-1
Manual Settings (Expansion Mode)
When the Temperature Control Unit is turned ON, the SP will be allocated to
the output word and the PV will be allocated to the PV word. By changing the
contents of the allocation, the following six set values can be read or written.
Parameter
Setting range
Unit
Default
Remarks
Set point
Proportional band
–999 to 9,999
0.1 to 999.9
°C/°F
°C/°F
0
40.0
-----
Integral time
Derivative time
0 to 3999
0 to 3999
Seconds 240
Seconds 40
-----
Hysteresis
Control period
0.1 to 999.9
1 to 99
°C/°F
0.8
Seconds 2
Input shift value
–99.9 to 999.9
°C/°F
0.0
--When SW1-6 is set to ON, the value can be changed.
In this case, the default is “2.”
---
Process value
Manipulated variable
–999 to 9,999
0.1 to 100.0
°C/°F
%
-----
Read-only
Read-only
Status
---
---
---
Read-only
283
Section 3-6
AT (Expansion Mode)
Write an allocation change code to the output for allocation changes. The following is the format of the allocation change code.
C
0
Data number on the input side (select from the following table)
Data number on the output side (select from the following table)
Output side
Contents
No.
Input side
Contents
No.
Enabled
0
1
Set point
Proportional band
0
1
Set point
Proportional band
Always enabled.
For PID control.
2
3
Integral time
Derivative time
2
3
Integral time
Derivative time
For PID control.
For PID control.
4
5
Hysteresis
Control period
4
5
Hysteresis
Control period
For ON/OFF control.
For PID control.
6
7
Input shift
(Not selectable)
6
7
Input shift
Process value
Always enabled.
Always enabled.
8
9
(Not selectable)
(Not selectable)
8
9
Manipulated variable
Status
Always enabled.
Always enabled.
Example
If the user wants to write derivative time to the output word and a control
period to the input word, input C350 as the allocation change code to be written.
Note When the Temperature Control Unit is turned on, the allocation change code
“C070” will be written.
Use the following procedure on the Programming Console for allocation
changes.
Default: SP = 100 °C and PV = 98 °C
? ?
'&
Write the allocation change code “C350” to the output word of the relevant
loop and confirm that the input word will become C350.
? ?
?!# ?!#
Write the derivative time to the output word so that the control period will be
read from the input word.
? ?
"
Note To put the Temperature Control Unit into expansion mode, change the jumper
pin on the side of the Unit from 2 and 3 to 1 and 2.
284
Section 3-6
AT (Expansion Mode)
Data Status
Word
0
0
0 0
The following are set to "1" under the conditions given.
Loop 1:
Sensor error
Loop 2:
Sensor error
Not used
Loop 1:
Auto-tuning (AT) execute
Loop 2:
Auto-tuning (AT) execute
Loop 1:
Control output ON
Loop 2:
Control output ON
Not used
Control period:
SW1-6 ON.
Number of loops:
SW1-5 ON
Input sensor:
SW1-4 ON
Temperature scale: SW1-3 ON
Control operation:
SW1-2 ON
Control mode:
SW1-1 ON
Not used
Note The data status is updated every 200 ms.
3-6-2
Set Value Read
Execute the following on the Programming Console for loops 1 and 2.
1,2,3...
1. Read the proportional band.
Default: SP = 100 °C and PV = 98 °C
? ?
'&
Write the allocation change code “C010” to the output word of the relevant
loop.
? ?
+ '&
Confirm that the input word of the relevant loop will become C010.
? ?
+ +
Write the set point to the output word of the relevant loop.
? ?
+
Record the value read from the input word of the relevant loop as the proportional band.
? ?
+ "
2. Read the integral time.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C020” and write it as the integral time.
3. Read the derivative time.
285
Section 3-6
AT (Expansion Mode)
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C030” and write it as the derivative time.
4. Read the hysteresis.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C040” and write it as the hysteresis.
5. Read the control period.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C050” and write it as the control period.
6. Read the input shift.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C060” and write it as the input shift.
7. Read the manipulated variable.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C080” and write it as the manipulated variable.
8. Read the status.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C090” and write it as the status.
9. Return to the original status.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C010” with “C070” and execute so that the Temperature Control Unit will
return to the original status (i.e., the status when turning on the Temperature control Unit).
3-6-3
Set Value Write
Execute the following on the Programming Console for loops 1 and 2.
1,2,3...
1. Write the proportional band.
Default: SP = 100 °C and PV = 98 °C
? ?
'&
Write the allocation change code “C110” to the output word of the relevant
loop.
c100 c001
C110 0098
Confirm that the input word of the relevant loop will become C110.
c100 c001
C110 C110
Write the set point to the output word of the relevant loop.
c100 c001
0400 C110
Confirm that the value read from the input word of the relevant loop is the
value that has been set
c100 c001
0400 0400
286
Section 3-7
Troubleshooting
2. Write the integral time.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C110” with “C220” and write it as the integral time.
3. Write the derivative time.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C110” with “C330” and write it as the derivative time.
4. Write the hysteresis.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C110” with “C440” and write it as the hysteresis.
5. Write the control period.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C110” with “C550” and write it as the control period.
6. Write the input shift.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C110” with “C660” and write it as the input shift.
7. Return to the original status.
Refer to the above procedure and replace the allocation change code
“C110” with “C070” and execute and then write the set point so that the
Temperature Control Unit will return to the original status (i.e., the status
when turning on the Temperature Control Unit).
Note The IOTC(––) instruction can be used with CQM1H CPU Units with lot number 0160 or later. If the ALLOCATE I/O command is sent, up to 250 ms may
be required to received a response just after power is turned ON. Program the
CPU Unit so that this command is not sent within the first 100 ms after power
is turned ON.
3-7
Troubleshooting
Error
Control output
Remedy
Watchdog timer error “EEEE” PV data for
Will be OFF for control Turn the power supply off and then back on. If
control loops 1 and 2.
loops 1 and 2.
the error persists, replace the Unit.
RAM read/write error “E100” PV data for control loops 1 and 2.
EEPROM error
“E120” PV data for control loops 1 and 2.
Setting range error
“EE01” PV data for con- Control will be normal. Reset the SV to within the proper range.
trol loops with error.
Sensor error
“E400” PV data for con- Will be OFF for control Check the connections to the input sensor and
trol loops with error.
loop with error.
cold junction compensator. If connections are
correct for both the input sensor and cold junction compensator, replace the Unit.
287
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W238-E1-10
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
Revised content
1
December 1993
2
June 1994
Parts IV, V, and VI added.
Page xi: Parts IV, V, and VI introductions added.
Page 25: Input and output words were opposite to each other and have been corrected.
Page 45: COM 1 corrected to CQM1 in the bottom diagram.
3
February 1995
Part I B7A Interface Units has been completely changed to reflect the addition of new
models. Part II G730 Interface Units added.
Sections 5, 6, and 7 have been added to Part VII Temperature Control Units.
Pages 22, 25: Switch diagram changed.
Pages 24, 38, 130: Terminal screw size added to the diagram.
Page 28: Note 1 at the bottom of the page rewritten.
Pages 29, 77, 145: Dimensions in the table corrected.
Page 29, 53, 54: Dimensions added to page.
Pages 53, 77: Accuracy specification corrected.
Page 77: Internal current consumption corrected.
Page 128: Third paragraph deleted since the current detection function is not provided.
Page 131: “PID with feed-forward circuitry” corrected to “Advanced PID” in the table.
4
October 1995
Part VII Linear Sensor Interface Unit added.
Pages 6, 7: Note 3 and caution added.
Page 23: Minimum input time and note 4 added to the table.
Page 87: Input circuit added for the Analog Input Unit.
Page 177: A table of available commands and functions added.
Page 189: Wording of description for I/O words corrected.
Page 204: Wording of note corrected.
4A
July 1996
Pages 66, 70: Note on EC directives added.
Page 78: CQM1-PA216 added.
Page 116: Reference for polygonal line conversion corrected.
5
June 1997
Page 5, 32, 62, 77, 78, 126, 170: CQM1-CPU4@ model numbers changed to CQM1CPU4@-EV.
Page 31: Number of I/O points changed from 192 to 256.
Page 63, 64: C200HX/HG/HE added to the PC column of the table. “(F)” added to
C1000H and C500.
Page 112, 113: Wiring diagrams changed for 3-1-2 Wiring and 3-1-3 Terminal Arrangement.
Page 138, 139, 143: Force measurements changed to SI units.
Page 157: Enclosure rating in the tables corrected.
Page 261: Setting and display accuracy specifications corrected.
6
November 1998
Added Precautions to the beginning of the manual.
Pages 10 to 14, 19, 34 to 36, 40, 41, 234: Added tightening torque value.
Page 108: Added Front View under 2-1 Nomenclature.
Page 186: Changed tightening torque value.
Page 238: Added a note to the wiring diagram.
7
September 1999
Information relating to CQM1H added.
Original production
289
Revision History
Revision code
Date
Revised content
8
August 2000
CQM1-TC20@/TC30@ were added to part VIII and part VIII was restructured. The following specific changes were also made.
Page xvi: Additions made to safety precautions.
Pages xvii and xviii: Additions and changes made to application precautions.
Page 232: First bullet in features rewritten.
Page 238: Bullet added to the bottom of the page.
Page 239: External supply voltage specification modified.
Page 244: IR 01700 condition in middle of diagram changed to NC condition.
Page 245: Program comments changed.
Page 251: Parameters added to table.
Page 252: Table modified.
Page 257: A note about the use of IOTC added.
Page 261: Control output specifications added.
09
December 2002
Pages 28, 32, 35, 50: Minor changes made to manual references.
Page 35, 36: Minor changes made to model numbers.
Pages 256, 257: “ASL” changed to “@ASL”.
10
November 2003
Page 242: “101” corrected to “102.”
Page 244: Model number corrected in table.
Page 264: Changes made to description of operations.
Page 265: Changes made to charts showing word allocations.
Pages 266 to 268: Layout changes made to ladder diagrams.
290
OMRON CORPORATION
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. W238-E1-10
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
No. 6182
OMRON Corporation
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
1
No. 6182
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
2
No. 6182
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
3
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
